Nokia of America CMP-40 Cellular Base Station Transceiver User Manual users manual 2

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	161961
Application ID	LjX1Oyr2QTdDgL93FRsVwQ==
Document Description	users manual 2
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	144.98kB (1812288 bits)
Date Submitted	2001-07-27 00:00:00
Date Available	2001-07-26 00:00:00
Creation Date	2000-09-21 04:32:05
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Sparc Solaris
Document Lastmod	2001-06-20 12:31:36
Document Title	users manual 2

Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-4.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)
Connector Identification (Contd)
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
Tx Antenna 1
Tx Antenna 2
Tx Antenna 3
Tx Antenna 4
Tx Antenna 5
Tx Antenna 6
RECEIVE 0 ANTENNA INPUTS
Rx 0 Antenna 0
Rx 0 Antenna 1
Rx 0 Antenna 2
Rx 0 Antenna 3
Rx 0 Antenna 4
Rx 0 Antenna 5
Rx 0 Antenna 6
RECEIVE 1 ANTENNA INPUTS
Rx 1 Antenna 0
Rx 1 Antenna 1
Rx 1 Antenna 2
Rx 1 Antenna 3
Rx 1 Antenna 4
Rx 1 Antenna 5
Rx 1 Antenna 6
†These connectors are not used on the Growth RCF.
Table 8-5.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)
Connector Identification
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
REFERENCE POWER DIVIDER (1:6)
REF(PD30)*
COM
SMA
15 MHz Reference Input
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 1 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 2 PD1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-34
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-5.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)
Connector Identification (Contd)
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 3 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 4 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 5 PD1
SMA
Not Used
REFERENCE POWER DIVIDER (1:6)
REF(PD30)†
COM
SMA
15 MHz Reference Input
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 0 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 1 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 2 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 3 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 4 PD1
SMA
15 MHz to Shelf 5 PD1
* Connections for P-RCF.
† Connections for Growth RCF.
Table 8-6.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)
Connector Identification
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
TRANSMIT ANTENNAS POWER COMBINERS (9:1)
0 (PD20)
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 1 Test to Tx SIG MON-0
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Tx Output 0
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 1 Test to Tx SIG MON-1
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Tx Output 1
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 2 Test to Tx SIG MON-2
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
1 (PD21)
2 (PD22)
Tx Output 2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-35
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-6.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)
Connector Identification (Contd)
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
3 (PD23)
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 3 Test to Tx SIG MON-3
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Tx Output 3
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 4 Test to Tx SIG MON-4
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Tx Output 4
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 5 Test to Tx SIG MON-5
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Tx Output 5
J1
SMA
Tx Ant 6 Test to Tx SIG MON-6
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
4 (PD24)
5 (PD25)
6 (PD26)
Table 8-7.
Tx Output 6
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,
Connector Identification
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
REF
TNC
15 MHz Reference Input
SET UP 0†
Set Up Antenna (for future use)
RTU IN†
Radio Test Unit Input
RTU OUT†
Radio Test Unit Output
TRANSMIT ANTENNA OUTPUTS
Tx Antenna 0
Tx Antenna 1
Tx Antenna 2
Tx Antenna 3
Tx Antenna 4
Tx Antenna 5
Tx Antenna 6
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-36
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-7.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,
Connector Identification (Contd)
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
RECEIVE 0 ANTENNA INPUTS
Rx 0 Antenna 0
Rx 0 Antenna 1
Rx 0 Antenna 2
Rx 0 Antenna 3
Rx 0 Antenna 4
Rx 0 Antenna 5
Rx 0 Antenna 6
RECEIVE 1 ANTENNA INPUTS
Rx 1 Antenna 0
Rx 1 Antenna 1
Rx 1 Antenna 2
Rx 1 Antenna 3
Rx 1 Antenna 4
Rx 1 Antenna 5
Rx 1 Antenna 6
†These connectors are not used on the Growth RCF.
Table 8-8.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)
Connector Identification
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
RECEIVE 0 ANTENNAS POWER DIVIDERS (1:9)
0 (PD1)
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 0 Input from 0
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 0 Input from 1
SMA
Not Used
1 (PD2)
2 (PD3)
J1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-37
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-8.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)
Connector Identification (Contd)
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 0 Input from 2
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 0 Input from 3
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 0 Input from 4
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 0 Input from 5
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
3 (PD4)
4 (PD5)
5 (PD6)
6 (PD7)
Table 8-9.
Rx 0 Input from 6
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)
Connector Identification
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
RECEIVE 1 ANTENNAS POWER DIVIDERS (1:9)
0 (PD11)
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 1 Input from 0
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
1 (PD12)
2 (PD13)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-38
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Rx 1 Input from 1
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-9.
Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)
Connector Identification (Contd)
Jack (Plug)
Conn Type
Function
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 1 Input from 2
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 1 Input from 3
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 1 Input from 4
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
Rx 1 Input from 5
J1
SMA
Not Used
J2 thru J10
SMA
J11
SMA
3 (PD14)
4 (PD15)
5 (PD16)
6 (PD17)
Rx 1 Input from 6
Note: For other transmit and receive options, refer to SD-2R26301 (P-RCF) or SD-2R264-01 (Growth RCF).
Series II Cell Site
Busbar Assembly
Unit, KS24355, L1
The Cell Site Busbar Assembly Unit utilizes plug-in Circuit Breakers for 5.0 A, 15.0
A, and 25.0 A. It also uses screw-in Capacitors. This unit equips the growth RCF
so that it can support 8 EDRUs per shelf.
The Growth Channel Frame Hardware is listed in the table below.
Table 8-10.
Growth Radio Channel Frame (G-RCF) J41660B-2 Hardware
Max
Qty
Item
Eqpt
Loc
Code
Cable Tray Assembly
Interconnection Panel
ED-2R831-30
21
KS24235, L5
Tx, Rx Power Dividers (9:1)
Tx, Rx Power Dividers (1:6)
KS24235, L6
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-39
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-10.
Growth Radio Channel Frame (G-RCF) J41660B-2 Hardware
Item
Max
Qty
Code
Eqpt
Loc
Radio Channel Unit Shelf (Shelf 0-5)
ED-2R834-30
13, 21
Transmit Combiner
BBN2B
+12V Power Converter
419AE
Radio Channel Unit
12
ED-2R836-30
ED-2R920-30
Digital Radio Unit
Power Converter Unit
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
430AB
(Req’d for EDRU)
Maximum 12
per shelf
44WR8
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI)
TN1713B or TN3500B
+5V Converter
430AB
Receive Switch Divider (Manual)
BBN1
KS24355, L1
Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 15.0 A
KS24356, L6
Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 25.0 A
10
KS24356, L8
Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 5.0 A
KS24356, L4
*Busbar Assembly Unit
(Manufactured 5/98 or later)
Note: This table is for hardware identification only. Do not use this table for ordering
hardware items.
* Replaces Circuit Breaker Assembly ED-2R826-30
and Capacitor Panel Assembly ED-2R829-30.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-40
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Mobile Switching Center
(MSC) Interface
Two data links provide the control and reporting interface between the Cell Site
and Mobile Switching Center (MSC). Either data link can control Cell Site
functions through the Radio Control Complex (RCC). Each data link interfaces
both of the processors located on the RCC. Only one processor is on-line at a
time. The other is in a standby mode, tracking functions being performed by the
on-line processor, in the event it is required to come on-line.
The on-line processor sends and receives control and data information over the
Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up."
Functions performed by the Cell Site units are controlled over the TDM bus. The
on-line processor also supplies data and control to each of the Radio Channel
Unit (RCUs).
Series II Cell Site architecture consists of three types of equipment frames:
1.
Radio Channel Frame (RCF) — Primary and a maximum of two growth
frames
2.
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) — Two frames, maximum
3.
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) — Two frames, maximum.
The P-RCF contains the Radio Channel Complex (RCC) as well as the shelves for
individual TDMA radios. The RCC controls the operation of the Cell Site
equipment. The LAF provides RF signal combining and amplification equipment,
while the AIF houses the Cell Site's reference frequency generator, receiver
calibration generator, and the RF filter networks that transport the RF signal to
and from the antennas.
A Radio Frame Set (RFS) consists of one, two, or three RCFs, all controlled by
one RCC. There will be one or two LAFs and one or two AIFs per Cell Site. Note
that each of the three RCFs may contain Digital Radio Units (DRUs) or Enhanced
Digital Radio Units (EDRUs). The DRU or EDRU is the radio unit used with Series
II TDMA. The DRU can be configured as a Voice radio (V-DRU) or a Locate radio
(L-DRU). One DRU occupies two analog Radio Channel Unit (RCU) slots and
provides three Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs). One EDRU occupies a single RCU
slot and also provides three DTCs. The EDRU can be configured as a Control/
Traffic (C/T-EDRU) or as an L-EDRU.
Series II analog hardware frames. DRUs, EDRUs, and the TDMA radio hardware,
can reside in the same Series II Cell Site RCFs as the analog 30-kHz RCUs.
Hardware wise, converting from Series II Cell Site with analog radios to Series II
TDMA radios is quite simple. For Series II TDMA, the plug-in DRUs and EDRUs
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-41
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
are added in the existing radio slots in the RFS. Note that it takes two RCU slots
for each DRU.
However, one DRU using a single carrier frequency supports three channels,
while the RCU (analog unit) using a single carrier frequency supports only one
channel. Note also, that an EDRU can perform all the same functions, and more,
of a DRU and takes up only one RCU slot. DRUs and EDRUs may be added to the
Series II Cell Site by replacing existing RCUs with DRUs or EDRUs. Additionally,
one TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) and one (analog) Radio Test Unit (RTU)
Control Board (see Figure 8-12) are required for each digitally equipped Cell Site.
RTU
CONTROL
BOARD
EQL 162
EQL 012
LEVEL 30
(SHELF 30
+V RTN 1 2 3 4
+V RTN 1 2 3 4
EQL 162
EQL 012
LEVEL 21
(SHELF 4)
REAR VIEW
RCU/DRU
REF FREQ.
RTU
SWITCH
RCU
TRANSMIT
RCU
REF.
FREQ.
RCU
REC1
RCU
REC0
Figure 8-12. Radio Test Unit (RTU) Control Board (AYD8) and Switch
Assembly (ED3R026-30) Location
The Series II Cell Site is based on a modular architecture. It includes controllers,
radios, wideband linear amplifiers, antennas, and associated equipment for
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-42
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
setting up and completing cellular calls. It can support AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA
simultaneously through the same wideband linear amplifier and antennas.
The AMPS radio consists of a single plug-in unit—the radio channel unit (RCU) or
the single-board RCU (SBRCU); either unit occupies one RCU slot. (The RCU
consists of two circuit boards, and the SBRCU consists of a single circuit board.
The RCU faceplate is wider than the SBRCU faceplate.) Similarly, the TDMA radio
consists of a single plug-in unit, the digital radio unit (DRU) or the enhanced digital
radio unit (EDRU); the DRU occupies two adjoining RCU slots, and the EDRU
occupies one RCU slot. In contrast, the CDMA radio consists of an entire shelf of
plug-in units.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-43
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier
Frame (LAF)
The major units of the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) are listed below and
described in the paragraphs that follow:
■
Frame Interface Assembly (FIA)
■
Linearizer Unit (LZR)
■
Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU).
The Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) is designated as J41660C-1, C-2. All Cell Sites
have at least one LAF with at least one Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC). Two
different (M)LACs are available depending on the output power needed. They are:
1.
100-Watt (M)LAC uses 10 Linear Amplifier Modules (LAMs).
2.
240-Watt (M)LAC uses 20 LAMs.
Three additional LACs may be configured as needed. A fully loaded LAF (LAF 0)
may contain up to four LACs. An additional LAF, may be added and may be
equipped with up to three LACs.
Table 8-11.
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) Hardware
Max
Qty
Item
Code
Linear Amplifier Frame 0 (Primary)
J41660C-1, C-2
Sniffer Combiner (For CDPD)
KS21604, L22A
ED-2R838-30
WP92103, L1
Frame Interface Assembly
Box Fan
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC)
J-41660CA-2, L6 (Full)
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC)
J-41660CA-2, L5
(Half)
Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit
(MLAC)
J-41660CA-3
RF Amplifier
Fan Blower
Linear Amplifier Module‡
KS23757, L1
WP92104, L1
10 or ED-2R840-30
20
* Up to three additional LACs can be provided in LAF 1.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-44
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Eqpt
Loc
70
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
FRAME
INTERFACE
ASSEMBLY
LEVEL
70
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
LEVEL
54
LINEARIZER
LEVEL
28
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
LEVEL
19
LEVEL
10
LINEARIZER
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
Figure 8-13. Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (J41660C-1)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-45
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT (LAU)
CONVERSION RECORD
#LAM
DATE CONVERTED
10
20
20
10
10
SWITCH
(SET TO 10
FOR 10 LAMs,
SET TO 20
FOR 20 LAMs)
LABEL (MARK DATE
CONVERTED TO 10 LAM
OR 20 LAM LAC)
20
10
LINEAR AMPLIFIER
FRAME (LAF)
LINEARIZER (LZR)
(COVER REMOVED)
LINEAR AMPLIFIER
CIRCUIT (LAC)
Figure 8-14. Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (Doors Removed)
Series II Cell Site
Linear Amplifier
Circuit J41660CA-1
The Linear Amplifier Unit (ED-2R839-30) and the Linearizer Unit (ED-2R841-30)
make up a Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) (see Figure 8-15). Up to four LACs may
be used. The Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) has either 10 or 20 pie-shaped Linear
Amplifier Modules (ED-2R840-30) operating in parallel. When all Linear Amplifier
Modules (LAMs) are equipped, the maximum average output power is 240 watts.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-46
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
The LAU has a power distribution board (AYM1), a 24-volt power filter, a cooling
fan, and a temperature sensor. The output from the LAU is applied to the antenna
interface frame. A splitter combiner assembly is also part of the LAU.
The term Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) (see Figure 8-16) is used to include all
major functional parts of the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF). The LAC provides high
power amplification of many transmit signals and controls the intermodulation
distortion. The LAC consists of the following:
■
Combiner-Preamplifier Circuit
■
Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU)
■
Linearizer (LZR).
Transmit signals originating at the RCF(s) are combined and amplified to a level
suitable for driving the input of the LZR. The LZR uses feed-forward, predistortion, and amplification of the input signal to cancel distortion and provides a
level necessary for driving the LAU. The LZR provides continuous control of gain
and phase to provide maximum distortion reduction. It also provides fault
detection, power distribution, and overload protection for the LAC.
The LAU consists of 10 or 20 LAMs arranged in parallel, a splitter-combiner
network, and a power distribution board. It amplifies the input signal to an output
level of 240 watts when fully configured with 20 LAMs (approximately 120 watts
when equipped with 10 LAMs). The +24 volt DC from the Cell Site power plant is
applied to the filter capacitor bank in the FIA. From here, power feeders 0 through
3 supply +24 volt DC to the LAU and power feeder 4 supplies +24 volt DC to the
LZR fan and to the Power Fault Monitor (PFM) board inside the LZR.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-47
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
YF4
Figure 8-15. Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC), Front View
The PFM board supplies +24 volt DC to the fan in the LAU; it also converts the
+24 volt DC to +5 and ±15 volt DC and applies these to the LAU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-48
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
The PFM board distributes the gain and phase adjustment signals between
various circuit boards in the LZR. It also monitors the fault status of the fans,
LAMs, and the LZR internal circuits. The fault status is processed and passed to
the AFI board in RCF0. When a critical fault condition occurs (for example, high
temperature), the +5 volt bias to the LAU shuts down. This turns the LAU off and
takes that particular LAC out of service. The fault condition continues to be
monitored and the LAC put back into service automatically if the condition is
cleared.
The PFM board also measures a portion of the LAC Radio Frequency (RF) output
signal level (TX signal loop 2). If the measurement is too high, the PFM sends an
attenuator control signal to the attenuator in the preamplifier to lower its gain.
Transmit signals from the RCF(s) are connected to one or more of the three inputs
of the 3:1 power combiner located in the FIA. Each input has an adjustable
attenuator for equalizing the RF path loss between the RCF(s) and the LAC
combiner input. The combiner output is connected to the input of the preamplifier
where the signal is amplified by 40 to 50 dB. The preamplifier has an externally
accessible gain control for setting the preamplifier gain, hence, the desired LAC
output power. It also can lower the gain from its set value through a feedback
control from the PFM.
The preamplifier has two amplifiers connected in parallel so that a failure within
the preamplifier will not shut down the whole LAC. The output of the two amplifiers
is continuously monitored by the PFM board, and a failure of one is indicated by
an LED on the PFM.
The output of the preamplifier is applied to and distortion correction circuits in the
LZR. The RF output from the LZR is applied to the LAMs in the LAU, where it is
amplified and applied through 50-dB coupler CP1 and high-power delay line DL2
to 10/50-dB coupler CP2 in the LZR. The 10-dB portion of CP2 is used to inject
the distortion correction signal into the main path, while the 50-dB portion is used
to couple off a signal for loop 2. The output of CP2 is coupled to circulator HY1,
which sends the RF signal to the AIF and also sends a reflected TX (Transmit)
signal back to the LZR.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-49
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT
P/O FRAME INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
(FIA)
FDR 0
FDR 1
FROM
CELLSITE
+24V DC
SUPPLY
FILTER
CAPACITOR
BANK
RF
FROM
RCUs
POWER
COMBINER
3:1
FDR 2
FDR 3
FDR 4
LINEAR AMPLIFIER UNIT
(LAU)
CPI
ATTEN./
PREAMP
P/O
LINEARIZER
UNIT
(LZR)
LZR IN
LZR OUT
LINEAR
AMP
DL2
DELAY
+24 PWR 0
+5V
+24 PWR 1
+15V
+24V FAN
ATTENUATOR
CONTROL
TO/FROM
ALARM/
FITS
BOARD
FAN ALARM
LAF ALARM STATUS REQUEST
TEMP. ALARM
LAF ALARM STATUS
MODULE STATUS
TX SIGNAL
LOOP 1
P/O
LZR
HY1
CP2
RF OUT TO
ANTENNA
INTERFACE
FRAME
IDM CORRECTION SIGNAL
TX SIGNAL LOOP 2
REFLECTED TX SIGNAL
TO LAC (1, 2, 3)
Figure 8-16. LAC Functional Diagram
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) Drawings
The following list provides the Drawing code numbers for the Linear Amplifier
hardware:
Code Number
SD2R265-01
SD2R266-01
SD2R271-01
J41660C
J41660CA
ED2R839-30
ED2R840-30
ED2R841-30
LAC Drawing
Linear Amplifier Circuit
Linear Amplifier Frame
Series II Cell Site
Linear Amplifier Frame
Linear Amplifier Circuit
Linear Amplifier Unit
Linear Amplifier Module
Linearizer Unit.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-50
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site, Differences Between A/B-Series and C-Series Linear
Amplifier Circuits (LACs)
This section describes the differences in alarm reporting between A/B-Series and
C-Series Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs). A description of LAC LED indicators
(See Table 8-12, and Table 8-13) and field replaceable fuses is also provided.
C-Series LACs provide improved power circuitry and alarm indications. C-Series
LACs are most easily distinguishable from A/B-Series LACs by the presence of
the 10/20 LAM Switch on the circular power distribution (AYM) board on the Linear
Amplifier Unit (LAU).
For additional information, consult Lucent Technologies Customer Information
Bulletin 196A, "Improved "C" Linear Amplifier Circuit Features."
Table 8-12.
Circui
Control/
Pack
Indicator
Linear Amplifier Frame / Linear Amplifier Circuit (J41660CA-1)
Controls and Indicators
Type
Function
Linear Amplifier Unit ED-2R839-30
AYM3
DS1-DS20
LED (Red)
Indicates +24-volt power failure to
the associated Linear Amplifier
Module.
Linearizer ED-2R841-30
AYE1
AYG1
SW1
Sets address of the LAC.
SW2
Factory/field switch.
SW3
SW4
Supplies pilot signal to the Gain
Phase Adjuster AYF1.
STATUS
Input Drive
LED (Red)
Indicates a problem with the RF input.
Fans
LED (Red)
Indicates a fan failure.
Preamplifier
LED (Red)
Indicates one or both input
preamplifiers have failed.
Linear Amplifier Unit
LED (Red)
Indicates a fan failure, high temperature, or LAM failures in the LAU.
Linearizer
LED (Red)
Indicates a fan failure, power supply
failure, or excessive intermodulation
distortion
in the Linearizer.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-51
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-13.
Fuse
Linear Amplifier Frame / Linear Amplifier Circuit (J41660CA-1)
Fuses
Designation
Voltage Supplied To Circuit
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER UNIT
FAN
F9, 5A, +24V
Fan B2 in the LAU by Temp. Sensor
EAP1 and filter FL1
19, 54
PREAMPLIFIER
F10, 2A, +24V
F11, 2A, +24V
Attenuator Preamplifier PA1
in the Linearizer
10, 28
LINEARIZER FAN
F12, 3A, +24V
Fan B1 in the Linearizer by TB1
10, 28
FCA
F13, 10A, +24V AYH2 board in the Linearizer
Series II Cell Site
Linear Amplifier
Module ED-2R84030
10, 28
The Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) is capable of handling 20 Linear Amplifier
Modules (LAMs) (See Figure 8-17). Two sets of 10 modules must be used — one
set may be non-amplifying modules.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-52
Location
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Figure 8-17. Linear Amplifier Module (LAM)
Series II Cell Site
Linear Amplifier
Unit (LAU)
The Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) (see Figure 8-18) receives the Radio Frequency
(RF) output from the linearizer unit (LZR) and applies it to an Linear Amplifier
Module (LAM) where it is amplified and then processed out to the Antenna
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-53
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Interface Frame (AIF). The LAU also contains a cooling fan and a temperature
sensor (overheat sensor).
PRINTED WIRING
BOARD AYM3
FAN
LINEAR AMPLIFIER
MODULE
ED-2R840-30
FRONT VIEW
Figure 8-18. Linear Amplifier Unit ED-2R839-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-54
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
LAM
LEDs
LAM
FUSES
10/20
SWITCH
Figure 8-19. Location of LAM Fuses, LEDs, and the 10/20 Switch (on C-Series
LACs)
Series II Cell Site,
20-LAM LAC
Versus 10-LAM
LAC
When Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs) are shipped from the factory, they are
configured as full-power (20-LAM) LACs (see Figure 8-19). If they are to be
installed as low-power (10-LAM) LACs, an in-line SMA attenuator must be
installed in Series with a coaxial cable in the Linearizer (LZR) and, on C-Series
LACs, the 10/20 switch on the front of the circuit AYM board must be changed to
the 10 position. To change back to a 20-LAM LAC, the in-line attenuator must be
removed and the switch returned to the 20 position. A label (CONVERSION
RECORD) is provided on the front face of the Linearizer cabinet on C-Series
LACs and should be marked with the date of any 10/20 conversion. A suitable
label should also be placed on any A/B-Series LACs which are converted.
NOTE:
Any new C-Series LACs shipped from the factory as replacements will not
have attenuators. The attenuators may be obtained from Lucent
Technologies as a spare part, Comcode 406825794 or 406822064. Any
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-55
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
new C-Series, half-power LACs ordered will have the attenuator shipped
loose as part of J41660CA-1, List 3 or J41660CA-2, List 4.
Series II Cell Site
Linearizer Unit
ED-2R841-30
The Linearizer unit (LZR) (see Figure 8-20, and Figure 8-23) is located in a shelf
below each Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU). The LZR contains circuits that function to
reduce intermodulation distortion. The LZR contains a power fault monitor board.
This board monitors faults and sends alarms back to the Radio Control Frame
(RCF).
The Linearizer Unit (LZR) receives the combined Radio Frequency (RF) input
from the Frame Interface Assembly (FIA) and functions to reduce the
intermodulation distortion prior to applying the RF input to the Linear Amplifier
Unit (LAU). The LZR also has circuits to monitor alarm conditions on the Linear
Amplifier (LAF).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-56
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
FRONT VIEW
KS-14174,L ( )
PIN, DESIGNATION
105517155
AYF2
PWB (GAIN PHASE
ADJUSTER 2 (GPA2))
J42
KS-21603, L5
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
WP-92702, L1
CIRCULATOR
PART OF KIT,
LINEARIZER
846531754
846491843
BRACKET, FAN
J48
J44
PART OF KIT,
LINEARIZER
846531754
846492015
BASE
AIR
FLOW
FAN
J32
WP-92068, L2
DELAY LINE
AYH1 PRINTED WIRING
BOARD (PRE-DISTORTION
DRIVER (PDD))
AYH2 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
(FINAL CORRECTION
AMPLIFIER (FCA))
FRONT VIEW
(FACEPLATE REMOVED FOR CLARITY)
Figure 8-20. Linearizer (LZR) Unit ED-2R841-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-57
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
AYG1 PRINTED WIRING
BOARD (POWER FAULT
MONITOR (PFM))
J36
HY1
CP2
J41
J4
-10 -50
J49
J25
J35
P11
P15
J5
J44
TOP VIEW
J52
AYE2 PRINTED WIRING
BOARD (RF POWER
SENSOR (RPS))
AYF1 PRINTED WIRING
BOARD (GAIN PHASE
ADJUSTER 1 (GPA1))
AYE1 PRINTED WIRING
BOARD (CONTROLLER/
ANALYZER BOARD (CAB))
Figure 8-21. Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-58
J32
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
J10
J3
J6
P14
J2
P13
J1
J9
J7
J33
P1
J8
REAR VIEW
J45
J51
J47
J50
J38
J31
J37
J46
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 8-22. Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-59
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
STATUS
STATUS
INPUT DRIVE
INPUT DRIVE
ANTENNA
FANS
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
PRE-AMPLIFIER
PRE-AMPLIFIER
LINEARIZER
LINEARIZER
LINEARIZER
FAN
PRE
AMPLIFIER
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
FAN
10A
24V
FCA
3A
24V
LINEARIZER
FAN
2A
24V
2A
24V
5A
24V
PRE
AMPLIFIER
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
FAN
Figure 8-23. Linearizer Faceplate with the Front Grille Removed
Please refer to Lucent Technologies Practice 401-660-125 for a full description of
the Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC) J-41660CA-3.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-60
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site Frame Interface
Assembly ED-2R838-30
The frame interface assembly contains the connectors used to interface the Linear
Amplifier Frame (LAF) with the power plant and Radio Channel Frames (RCFs).
Also, this assembly contains 20 capacitors used to filter the +24 volt supply.
The Frame Interface Assembly (FIA) (see Figure 8-24) contains a bank of filter
capacitors used to filter the DC voltage applied to the Linearizer unit (LZR) and
the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU). In addition, the FIA combines the Radio
Frequency (RF) inputs from the Radio Channel Frames (RCFs) through a 3:1
power combiner and applies the combined RF output to an attenuator/
preamplifier. The output of this attenuator/preamplifier is adjusted as required and
applied to the LZR. Also, Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) alarm status request and
alarms pass through the FIA.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-61
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
C10
C20
C15
C5
C9
C19
C14
C4
C8
C18
C13
C3
PD1
(LAC 0)
(LAC 4)
PD1
(LAC 2)
(LAC 6)
PD1
(LAC 3)
P2
LAC 1
LAC 5
PA1
P4
LAC 3
PA1
P3
LAC 2
LAC 6
PD1
(LAC 1)
(LAC 5)
P1
LAC 0
LAC 4
PA1
PA1
AIR
INLET
AIR
OUTLET
LAC 0
LAC 4
LAC 2
LAC 6
LAC 3
LAC 1
LAC 5
/O J41660CA-1
HOWN FOR
EFERENCE ONLY
TOP VIEW
(DOOR, HINGES, CABLE DUCT & BRACKET, CONNECTOR REMOVED)
Figure 8-24. Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-62
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
P3
LAC 2
LAC 6
P4
LAC 3
P1
LAC 0
LAC 4
P2
LAC 1
LAC 5
C6
C16
C11
C1
C7
C17
C12
C2
TB1
C8
C18
C13
C3
C9
C19
C14
C4
C10
C20
C15
C5
BOTTOM VIEW (CABLE DUCT REMOVED)
ED2R83B-30
J1
J2
REAR VIEW
Figure 8-25. Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-63
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site Antenna Interface
Frame (AIF), Overview
The major hardware units on the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) are listed below
and are described functionally in the following paragraphs.
■
Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel
■
Reference Frequency Generator (RFG)
■
Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch
■
Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG)
■
Receive Filter Panel (RFP)
■
Transmit Filter Panel.
PRIMARY—AIF0
RCF
RTU/
TRTU/
CRTU
RCF
LAC 0
RCF
15 MHz
GROWTH—AIF1
REF FREQ GEN
RCVR CAL GEN
RTU Switch Panel
RX 0 TX RX 1
RCF
LAC 4
RCF
ANT 1
RCF
LAC 5
RCF
ANT 2
RCF
LAC 6
RCF
RX 0 TX RX 1
RCF
LAC 1
RCF
RX 0 TX RX 1
RCF
LAC 2
RCF
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 4
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 5
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 6
ANT 3
RCF
LAC 3
RCF
RCC
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 0
ALARMS
ALARMS
Figure 8-26.
FIF
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram
The Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) has two configurations—a primary frame
(J41660E-2) and a growth frame (J41660F-2). The Antenna Interface Frame
(AIF) provides the interface and signal filtering circuitry required to complete the
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-64
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Cell Site Receive (RX) and Transmit (TX) RF paths from the RX and TX antennas
to the LAFs and Radio Channel Unit (RCUs) inside the RCFs. This is
accomplished through the TX and RX filter panels (TFPs and RFPs) in the AIF.
In addition to the Radio Frequency (RF) filtering and interface circuitry, the AIF
contains the test circuitry required for radio diagnostics. A test switch matrix is
used to establish the required test paths. A Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG)
is used to set a known level for RX path loss calibration. The AIF also contains a
highly accurate Cell Site Reference Frequency Generator.
The major assemblies making up each configuration are listed and described
below. Note that a duplexer filter panel is available to replace the separate receive
and transmit filter panels. The duplexer filter panel has one configuration for the
“A” band and another for the “B” band.
ALARMS
POWER/ALARM
TO
RADIO
CHANNEL
FRAME
SET
REFERENCE
RF TEST
REF FREQ GENERATOR
TEST SWITCH MATRIX
CALIBRATION GENERATOR
RECEIVE RF
TRANSMIT FILTER PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
COAX
FEEDER
CABLES
TO
ANTENNAS
TRANSMIT RF
TO
LINEAR
AMPLIFIER
FRAME(S)
TRANSMIT FILTER PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
Figure 8-27. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Architecture
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-65
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
RTU
SWITCH PANEL (RSP)
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
J3
XMTR
J2
TX-ANT
MONITOR
ANTENNA
1:2
J4
FROM TFP0 (-40 dB PORT)
OR DFP0 (PD2-J2)
RAP
FROM
SH 3
FROM
SH 3
FROM OTHER
TFP’s (-50 dB PORT)
OR DFP’s (PD1-J2)
1:2
RTU RX
TO
RCF0
FROM TFP0 (-50 dB PORT)
OR DFP0 (PD1-J2)
FROM
SH 3
FROM AIF0
R0FP0 OR
DFP0
FROM
SH 3
FROM 10
AIF0
R1FP0
1:6
1:6
FROM OTHER
TFP’s (-40 dB PORT)
OR DFP’s (PD2-J2)
7:1
1:6
TO R0FP0 (-50 dB PORT)
OR DFP0 (PD1-J3)
TO
SH 3
1:6
TO OTHER DIV0
RFP’s (-50 dB PORT)
OR DFP’s (PD1-J3)
RCVR
FROM
SH 1
P1
RX-ANT
TO
SH 3
TO OTHER DIV0
RFP’s (-40 dB PORT)
OR DFP’S (PD2-J2)
1:7
RTU TX
FROM
RCF0
TO R0FP0 (-40 dB PORT)
OR DFP0 (PD2-J3)
FROM
OTHER
AIF0
RFP’s
OR
DFP’s
1:6
1:6
DIV0
J1
TO R1FP0 (-50 dB PORT), SH 3
DIV1
1:6
TO OTHER DIV1
RFP’s (-50 dB PORT)
RCVR
1:6
POWER AND
CONTROL
FUTURE
APPLICATIONS
RX-ANT
TO R1FP0 (-40 dB PORT), SH 3
P2
1:7
TO OTHER DIV1
RFP’s (-40 dB PORT)
RAP
RTU-S
Figure 8-28. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-66
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
(NON-DUPLEXER)
TO
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA
TRANSMIT FILTER PANEL 0
TFP0
CP3
FL3
BPF
J4
-40 dB
FROM
LINEAR AMPLIFIER
CIRCUIT 0
(LAC0)
-50 dB
TO RSP
(SH 2)
FROM
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL, DIV0
R0FP0 (A BAND)
HY1
CP1
J4
-40 dB
50
FL2
NOTCH
FL1
BPF
-50 dB
CP2
TO RAP
(SH 2)
J3
FROM RCG
(SH 1)
FROM RSP
(SH 2)
+24V
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL, DIV1
R1FP0 (B BAND)
FROM
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
CP1
J4
-40 dB
FL2
NOTCH
FL1
BPF
10
CP2
-50 dB
TO RAP
(SH 2)
J3
FROM RCG
(SH 1)
FROM RSP
(SH 2)
+24V
TYPICAL FILTER PANEL SET
(DUPLEXER)
DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
DFP0
TO COMBINED
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE
ANTENNA
CP3
J4
DUPLEXER
-40 dB
J2
FROM
LAC0
-50 dB
PD2
1:2
FL3
BPF
PD1
1:2
J3
J2
FL1
BPF
CP2
J3
TO RAP
(SH 2)
J3
FROM RCG
(SH 1)
TO/FROM RSP
(SH 2)
+24V
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
R1FP0
FROM
RECEIVE
ANTENNA
CP1
J4
FL1
BPF
-40 dB
-50 dB
FROM RSP
(SH 2)
10
CP2
TO RAP
(SH 2)
J3
FROM RCG
(SH 1)
+24V
Figure 8-29. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-67
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
RECEIVE AND POWER
DISTRIBUTION
(RP)
AIF1
24V
EEDERS
ROM
IF0
DIV0 PREAMP POWER
DIV1 PREAMP POWER
+24V FEEDERS
TO
AIF1 PREAMPS
1:6
1:6
1:6
FROM
AIF1
RFP’s
OR
DFP’s
OUTPUTS
TO
RCF(s)
1:6
1:6
1:6
Figure 8-30. Antenna Interface Growth Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-68
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site
Reference
Frequency
Generator (RFG)
Shelf
The Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) provides a 15-MHz precision
reference frequency at a level of +12 dBm ±2 dB. The 15-MHz signal is used as a
reference frequency by the Radio Channel Units (RCUs) and the Radio Test Unit
(RTU) to produce the desired output frequency. The oscillator circuit is monitored
for and indicates when a fault has occurred. When the RFG shelf supports two
oscillators, only one oscillator is on line at a time as indicated by Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs).
There are three options available for the RFG shelf, as follows:
1.
RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator.
2.
RFG shelf with two (2) Rubidium oscillators.
3.
RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator and one (1) crystal oscillator.
Series II Cell Site Receiver Calibration Generator ED-2R845-30
This unit generates the Radio Frequency (RF) test signals used in calibrating the
RF path loss within the Cell Site.
The Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) provides a stable unmodulated
calibration signal on Mobile Transmit channel 990. The RCG has a total of 16
Radio Frequency (RF) ports (only 14 are used). These ports are coupled to the
inputs of the preamplifiers in the receive paths inside the AIF through 20-dB
directional couplers. The calibration signal is used by each Radio Channel Unit
(RCU to determine a correction factor required for its Received Signal Strength
Indicator (RSSI) output. The correction factor is used to compensate for non
frequency dependent losses in each RCU receive path.
The stability of the RCG output frequency is the same as that of the 15-MHz
reference frequency. The RCG output frequency is factory preset to channel
990—824.01 MHz. The nominal output power level of each of the 16 RCG ports is
-58 dBm ±1.5 dB.
There are four translations entries which affect Receiver Calibration.
■
Frequency (Found in the Cell Form)
■
Tolerance (Also found in the Cell Form)
■
Receive Signal Strength Calibration Diversity 0 (Referred to as the
Expected Value, found in the CEQFACE form)
■
Receive Signal Strength Diversity 1 (Referred to as the Expected Value,
also found in the CEQFACE form).
The RCUs must be reset before these parameters will have an effect. The
Receive Signal Strength Calibration parameters for diversity 0 and 1 apply to each
face. Changing either of these parameters will only affect the RCUs on that face.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-69
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
During an RCU restore sequence, the data decoder tunes to the calibration
channel (990) and makes signal strength measurements for each antenna
diversity. As a result of these measurements, one of the following three things
happens:
■
If the measurement falls within the tolerance value but is not exactly the
same as the expected value, the decoder records the difference between
the expected value and the actual measurement. Subsequent
measurements made by that radio are adjusted by this value.
■
If any of the measurements fall outside of tolerance, no corrections are
made to the measured signal strengths. Also, a Receiver Calibration HEH
Error message is printed out on the receive-only printer (ROP).
■
If the measured value is the same as the expected value, no adjustments
are made.
Receiver calibration errors can be the result of incorrect translations, defective RF
cabling, faulty RCUs, defective preamps, or basically any problem found between
the RCG and the RCUs.
There are two AIF models—AIF0 (primary) and AIF1 (growth). AIF0 contains a
Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel (RAP), an RFG, an RCG, and a
Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP). AIF0 can be equipped with one to four sets of
filter panels (a single set consists of one TX and two RX filter panels unless it is
duplexed).
AIF1 Frame
AIF1 serves as an auxiliary frame to accommodate additional filter panels. It
contains a Receive and Power (RP) Distribution Panel and can be equipped with
one to three additional filter panel sets.
Integrated Duplexer Filter Panels (DFPs) are optional. When equipped, a DFP
assembly can be used to combine a TX filter panel with an RX filter panel and
share one combined RX/TX antenna port, thus reducing the required number of
antennas from three to two per antenna face. Unless otherwise specified, a DFP
combines the RX DIV0 path with the TX path.
AIF0 combined with AIF1 accommodates up to seven antenna faces, typically
consisting of seven TX paths and 14 RX paths. Each antenna face requires an RX
filter for the diversity 0 (DIV0) RX path, a TX filter for the TX path, and an RX filter
for the diversity 1 (DIV1) RX path.
There are some interframe connections between AIF0 and AIF1 to provide the
following circuit functions. The RSP in AIF0 switches test signals from the RTU
(located in the P-RCF) to and from various RX and TX paths of both AIF0 and
AIF1 for system diagnostics. The RAP panel in AIF0 connects the +24 volt DC
power supplies to all of the preamplifiers inside the Receiver Filter Panels (RFPs)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-70
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
or DFP(s) of both AIF0 and AIF1. The RCG in AIF0 provides a leveled signal to
calibrate all of the RX paths from the AIF equipment all the way to the inputs of the
RCUs. There are RF connections from AIF0 to the RCF(s), the LAF(s), the RX
antennas and the TX antennas.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-71
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
RECEIVE, ALARM & POWER
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
REFERENCE FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
RECEIVER CALIBRATION
GENERATOR
RADIO TEST UNIT
SWITCH
RECEIVE
SECTION
TRANSMIT
SECTION
DUPLEXER
FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
DUPLEXER FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
DUPLEXER FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
DUPLEXER FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
D-2R820-30
ABINET
PRIMARY FRAME - WITH DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Figure 8-31. Primary Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) J41660E-2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-72
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
RECEIVE, ALARM & POWER
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
REFERENCE FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
RECEIVER CALIBRATION
GENERATOR
RADIO TEST UNIT
SWITCH
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
D-2R820-30
ABINET
PRIMARY FRAME - WITHOUT DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Figure 8-32. Primary Antenna Interface Frame J41660E-2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-73
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
POWER AND
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
RECEIVE
SECTION
TRANSMIT
SECTION
DUPLEXER
FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER PANEL
DUPLEXER FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
DUPLEXER FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
D-2R820-30
ABINET
SECONDARY FRAME-WITH DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Figure 8-33. Growth Antenna Interface Frame J41660F -2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-74
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
RECEIVE AND POWER
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
TRANSMIT FILTER
PANEL
RECEIVE FILTER
PANEL
ED-2R820-30
CABINET
SECONDARY FRAME-WITHOUT DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Figure 8-34. Growth Antenna Interface Frame J41660F-2
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-75
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site
Radio Switch
Panel
Series II Cell Site Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch Panel
This switch panel establishes the functional Radio Frequency (RF) test path used
by the Radio Test Unit (RTU) during diagnostic testing. These paths include the
following:
■
Receiver-Forward Signal Injection
■
Receiver-Reflected Signal Injection
■
Transmit-Forward Signal Measurement
■
Transmit-Reflected Signal Measurement.
The test paths are made through directional couplers containing forward and
reflected ports. Under software control, the RTU switch establishes the required
paths to test all major functional operations.
The Radio Switch Panel (RSP) provides the RTU (located in RCF0) access to the
Cell Site Rx and Tx (Receive and Transmit) paths through a test matrix Radio
Frequency (RF) distribution network. The RTU is coupled to the incident and
reflected path of every antenna used by the Cell Site through the RSP. RF test
signals to and from the RTU test receiver and the transmitter are connected to the
RSP. The RSP receives logic control signals from the RTU to switch the RF test
signals from the RTU to the Rx and Tx paths under test.
The RTU is used primarily to verify the Rx and Tx paths to and from the transmit
and receive antennas of the Cell Site. The RTU contains a test receiver and test
generator which serve to simulate a subscriber unit. The test receiver and the test
generator can be tuned to any channel. Tuning is accomplished with commands
sent over the TDM bus to an Rx/Tx frequency synthesizer within the RTU. The
RTU controls the RF switches located in the RSP. The TDM bus is always installed
"red stripe up."
During Rx testing on a Cell Site Radio Channel Unit (RCU), the test generator
within the RTU is tuned to the channel under test, and the output of the test
generator is applied to the appropriate Cell Site receiving antenna. Control is
applied to the RSP in AIF0 to select Omni Rx or one face of the directional
antenna. RCU transmitter testing is accomplished by connecting the test receiver
to the appropriate Tx path and tuning the RTU to the channel under test.
Series II Cell Site
Receive, Alarm,
and Power
Distribution Panel
ED 2R851-30
This panel provides an interface between the primary Antenna Interface Frame,
AIF0, and other Cell Site equipment for distributing the receive signals, the alarm
and control signals, and the +24-volt DC power. The +24-volt DC for the growth
AIF1 is supplied from this panel.
The Receive, Alarm, and Power (RAP) distribution panel contains the circuit
breakers that feed +24 volts to units on the primary Antenna Interface Frame (AIF)
and to the growth frame. This panel also contains power dividers used to distribute
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-76
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
received Radio Frequency (RF) to the Radio Channel Frame (RCF) and alarm tiepoints for customer alarms. These alarms are fed back to the Alarm/FITS (Factory
Installation Test Set) board located on the P-RCF.
The +24 volt DC power from the power plant is applied as FDR0 through CB1 to
the RFG, through CB4 to the Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG), and through
CB5 to all of the preamplifiers inside the DIV0 Rx filter panels of both AIF0 and
AIF1. FDR1 is applied through CB2 to the RFG, through CB3 to the RSP, and
through CB6 to the DIV1 Rx filter panels in both AIF0 and AIF1.
The RAP panel provides user alarm connections and alarm signals from the AIFs
to the RCF0 alarm circuits. It also provides interface connections between the
RTU (inside RCF0) and the RSP (inside AIF0). The antenna select output of the
RTU sends logic signals to command the RSP to switch the Radio Frequency
(RF) test signals from the RTU to various Rx and Tx (Receive and Transmit)
antenna paths under test. The antenna message acknowledge output of the RSP
acknowledges the RTU upon successful execution of its commands.
Series II Cell Site
Receive and Power
Distribution Panel
ED-2R853-31
This panel is located in the growth Antenna Interface Frame, AIF1, and provides
an interface between AIF1 and other Cell Site equipment for distributing the
receive signals and the +24-volt DC received from AIF0.
The outputs of the preamplifiers in the RFPs or DFPs are connected to the
respective 1:6 power dividers mounted inside the RAP. The amplified Rx signals
are distributed to the RCF(s). All of the unused ports on the 1:6 dividers must be
terminated into a 50-ohm resistive load.
The Receive and Power (RP) distribution panel distributes the Rx signals and +24
volt DC within AIF1. The outputs of the preamplifiers in the RFPs or DFP(s) are
connected to the 1:6 power dividers mounted inside the RP panel. The amplified
Rx signals are distributed to the RCF(s) from these power dividers.
Series II Cell Site
Duplexer Filter
Panel
ED-2R848-31
This filter panel is a combination receive and transmit filter panel with a single Rx/
Tx (Receive/Transmit) antenna port. Two configurations of this filter panel are
used—one for “A” band and one for “B” band. The group number designates the A
or B configuration.
One duplexer filter panel is required for each antenna face and one receive filter
panel is required for diversity.
The Duplexer Filter Panel (DFP) is a combined receive and transmit filter panel.
Functionally, the receive and transmit circuits are the same as the separate
receive and transmit filter panels, except that it provides a combined Rx/TS
(Receive/Transmit) antenna port. This allows the Cell Site to use one less
antenna. A separate list number is used to designate use with bands A and B.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-77
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
The Duplexer Filter Panel (DFP) combines a Tx filter panel with an Rx filter panel
and has a single Rx/Tx (Receive/Transmit) antenna port. A duplexing technique is
applied, enabling the system to use a combined Rx/Tx antenna configuration that
reduces the required number of antennas in each antenna face from three to two.
The duplexer steers the Rx signals from the combined Tx/Rx antenna to the input
of the BPF in the Rx path and directs the Tx signals from the output of the Tx filter
to the Tx/Rx combined antenna port. Unless otherwise specified, the duplexer is
normally used to combine the DIV0 Rx path with the Tx path.
The connections to the DFP are similar to those of the TFP and RFP, except there
is only one antenna port for the combined Tx/Rx antenna function. There is only
one dual-port directional coupler (-50 dB and -40 dB) required in the DFP. Two 2:1
combiners are used to provide connections to the RTU for radio test diagnostics.
The calibration signal from the Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) is coupled
into the Rx path through a 20-dB directional coupler similar to that of the RFP.
Series II Cell Site
Receive Filter
Panel
ED-2R846-31
This filter panel contains a bandpass and a notch filter, a low-noise receive
preamplifier and two couplers used to inject forward and reflected Radio
Frequency (RF) test signals. These test signals are used to test the receive path
for the Radio Channel Units (RCUs). One filter panel is required for each receive
path inside the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) unless a Duplex Filter Panel is
used.
The Receive Filter Panel (RFP) receives the Radio Frequency (RF) from the
receive antennas. The RF is first passed through a coupler where test signals may
be injected (forward and reflected). The RF is then passed through a bandpass
filter and a notch filter. A second coupler, after the filters, provides an injection
point for the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) calibration frequency. The receive RF is
then applied through a preamplifier to power dividers for distribution into the RCF.
The RFP works on both A and B bands.
One Receive Filter Panel (RFP) is required for each receive path inside the AIF
unless a Duplexer Filter Panel is used. Typically, each antenna face has two Rx
(Receive) paths for diversity 0 and diversity 1. The RFP contains a dual-port (-40
dB and -50 dB) directional coupler, a Band Pass Filter (BPF), a notch filter, a 20dB directional coupler, and a 44-dB preamplifier.
The received Radio Frequency (RF) signal from the Rx antenna is sent through
the dual-port directional coupler to the input of the BPF. The -40 dB and -50 dB
coupling ports of this coupler provide the RTU access to the Rx path of the AIF for
test purposes. The RTU sends and receives test signals through the RSP to these
ports in order to test the Rx path for each Radio Channel Unit (RCU) installed in
the RCF(s). Received RF signals from the Rx antenna are filtered and amplified
by the RFP before entering the RCU. The BPF (which is different for “A” and “B”
band customers) provides the required Rx path filtering characteristics. The
output of the BPF is followed by a notch filter.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-78
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
The calibration signal from the Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) is coupled
into the Rx path through the 20-dB directional coupler at the output of the receive
filters. The calibration signal provides a means to determine a correction factor for
offsetting the difference in the loss tolerances in the different Rx paths of the
system.
The receive and calibration signals are amplified by the preamplifier inside the
RFP and sent to the RAP in AIF0 or the RP in AIF1.
A typical AIF0 with four antenna faces has a total of eight RFPs and eight 1:6
power dividers at the RAP, namely Face0 Rx0, Face0 Rx1, Face1 Rx0, Face1
Rx1, Face2 Rx0, Face2 Rx1, Face3 Rx0, and Face3 Rx1. A typical AIF1 with three
antenna faces has a total of six RFPs and six 1:6 power dividers at the RP, namely
Face4 Rx0, Face4 Rx1, Face5 Rx0, Face5 Rx1, Face6 Rx0, and Face6 Rx1. Each
RCF has at least one Rx path connection to one of the six ports of each 1:6
divider. This arrangement enables each RCF to have total access to all of the Rx
paths in AIF0 and AIF1. A maximum of six RCFs can be connected to each Rx
path to the 1:6 power dividers.
Series II Cell Site
Transmit Filter
Panel ED-2R847-31
This filter panel contains a transmit filter and a coupler for picking off a portion of
the forward and reflected power. These signals are used during Radio Frequency
(RF) diagnostic test.
The Transmit Filter Panel (TFP) receives transmitted Radio Frequency (RF) from
the LAF and passes it through a transmit filter assembly. The transmitted RF is
then fed through a coupler to the transmit antenna. The coupler provides ports for
picking off a portion of the forward and reflected RF.
One Transmit Filter Panel (TFP) is required for each antenna face. The TFP
contains a dual-port (-40 dB and -50 dB) directional coupler and a band pass
transmit filter. Tx (Transmit) signals from the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) are
amplified by the LAF before reaching the AIF. The Tx signals from the LAF are
filtered by the Tx filter inside the TFP before being transmitted out by the Tx
antenna. The filtered Tx signal is then sent through the dual-port coupler before
going to the Tx antenna. The -40 dB and -50 dB coupling ports of this coupler
provide the RTU access to the Tx path of the system for test purposes. The RTU
receives test signals through the RSP to these ports in order to test the Tx path for
each RCU installed in the RCF(s). The Tx filter separates out the unwanted
signals before transmitting to the Tx antenna.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-79
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-14.
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Hardware
Item
Max
Qty
Code
Antenna Interface Frame 0
J41660E-2
Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel
ED-2R851-30
Circuit Breakers (CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4) 3A
406026401
Circuit Breakers (CB5, CB6) 2.5A
406085092
Terminal Strip (TB5, TB6)
406131862
Splitter Mounting Kit
846441368
(per kit)
KS21604,L12
Power Divider (1:6)
RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator
407575638
RFG shelf with two (2) Rubidium oscillators
407575653
Provides an RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium
oscillator and one (1) crystal oscillator
407575646
Receiver Calibration Generator
ED-2R845-30
Power Divider
WP92070,L2
Signal Generator Circuit Pack
ARL3
Attenuator (AT1, AT3)
402910467
Attenuator (AT2)
402910442
Termination
461-1 (meca)
RTU Switch Panel
ED-2R850-30
TCI Circuit Pack
BBC1
RCV Circuit Packs
BBC2
Receive Filter Panel (“A” Band)
KS21603,L8
Coupler (CP2) 20 dB
KS21603,L7
Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1)
ED-2R815-30
Notch Receive Filter (FL2)
ED-2R816-30
Max
Qty
Code
Circulator (HY1)
WP92072,L2
Preamp (PA1)
KS21583,L3
Adapter
406083055
Termination
401-1 (meca)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-80
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
23
22
21
20
ED-2R846-31
Coupler (CP1) 40/50 dB
Item
Eqpt
Loc
Eqpt
Loc
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-14.
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Hardware (Contd)
Receive Filter Panel (“B” Band)
ED-2R846-31
Coupler (CP1) 40/50 dB
KS21603,L8
Coupler (CP2) 20 dB
KS21603,L7
Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1)
ED-2R810-30
Notch Receive Filter (FL2)
WP92064,L1
Preamp (PA1)
KS21583,L3
Adapter
406083055
Transmit Filter Panel (“A” Band; Installer
Mounted)
ED-2R847-31
Transmit Filter Panel (“B” Band; Installer
Mounted)
ED-2R847-31
Coupler (CP3)
KS21603,L8
Bandpass Filter (“A” Band)
ED-2R860-30
Bandpass Filter (“B” Band)
ED-2R860-30
Duplex Filter Panel (“A” Band)
ED-2R848-30
Coupler (CP2)
KS21603,L7
Coupler (CP3) 40/50 dB
KS21603,L8
Power Divider/Combiner (PD1, PD2)
KS21604,L1
Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1)
ED-2R815-30
Notch Receive Filter (FL2)
ED-2R816-30
Bandpass Transmit Filter (FL3)
ED-2R860-30
Preamp (PA1)
KS21583,L3
Circulator (HY1)
WP92072,L2
Adapter (ADPTR 1)
406083055
Termination (TRM1)
401-1 (meca)
ED-2R875-30
Duplexer Cable Assembly (DPX1)
Duplex Filter Panel (“B” Band)
ED-2R848-30
Coupler (CP2)
KS21603,L7
Coupler (CP3) 40/50 dB
KS21603,L8
Power Divider/Combiner (PD1, PD2)
KS21604,L1
Max
Qty
Code
Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1)
ED-2R810-30
Notch Receive Filter (FL2)
WP92064,L1
Bandpass Transmit Filter (FL3)
ED-2R860-30
Item
Eqpt
Loc
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-81
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-14.
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Hardware (Contd)
Preamp (PA1)
KS21583,L3
Adapter
406083055
Duplexer Cable Assembly
ED-2R875-30
* Two terminations are required for a full configuration.
Any other configuration requires more than two terminations.
Special Filters
Outside filters, KS-24020, L3 that were designed and required for the Korean
Mobile Telephone (KMT) application can be used as part of the Standard Series II
Cell Site AIF0 and AIF1. If KS-24020, L3 is used, then KS-24174, L1 and KS24022, L2 are not needed.
Transmit notch filters KS24234, L1 to L10, which were developed for the Air-toGround Telephone (AGT) application, can also be used as part of the Standard
Series II Cell Site. These are mounted on a standard 19-inch bay frame external
to the AIF and should be grounded appropriately.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-82
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Series II Cell Site Equipment
Summary
Table 8-15 provides a summary of Series II Cell Site Equipment.
Table 8-15.
SIIe Cell Site, R5.06 or Later
Physical - Frames
Description
P-RCF plus 1 or 2G-RCFs
Primary RCF with 1, or 2 Growth Frames
1 or 2 LAFs (up to 7 LACs)
1, or 2 Linear Amplifier Frames
1 Primary AIF
1 Growth AIF
RCF Equipage P-RCF Shelves
Same as in Companion Table
G-RCF Shelves
Standard Series II product with 6 radio shelves
Radios
Radio Types
RCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs
Locate
1-RCU, optional growth to a maximum number
allowed in standard Series II
Setup
1-RCU, optional growth to a maximum number
allowed in standard Series II
Voice
1-RCU/DRU/EDRU to a maximum allowed in any
combination subject to physically available
radio slots (depends on Setup RCU and Locate
RCU equipage)
Test
RTU and optional "TRTU"
Communications and Clock
TDM Buses
1 or 2
DS1 Lines
1 or 2
Data Links
1 or 2
CAT Boards
2 per TDM Bus
Configuration
Radio Control Complex
Redundant
Reference Frequency Generator
Non-redundant, redundant optional
Receiver Calibration Generator
Optional
Receive Switches
Optional
Voice Sectorization
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-83
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-15.
SIIe Cell Site, R5.06 or Later (Contd)
Physical - Frames
Description
Voice
Omnidirectional and/or 1 to 6 Sectors
Setup Configurations
Configurations
Omnidirectional or Directional
AIF Equipage Filter Panels
Simplex or Duplex
Translations Developments -
SIIe Translator
Series II Cell Site,
Related
Documentation
Table 8-16 below provides a list of supporting documentation. For instructions on
how to order this documentation, refer to Lucent Technologies 401-610-000,
Customer Documentation Catalog.
Table 8-16.
Series II Cell Site - Related Documentation
Document Title
Designation
Planning Guide
401-610-006
Data Base Update
401-610-036
Input Message Manual
401-610-055
Output Message Manual
401-610-057
System Routine and Corrective Maintenance
401-610-075
ECP/CDN Recovery/Messages Audits Manual
401-610-077
Cell Site Audits Manual
401-610-078
System Recovery
401-610-079
Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment
401-610-120
Service Measurements
401-610-135
Daily Operations
401-610-151
Multiple System Subscriber Administration (MSSA)
401-612-064
Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions
401-660-101
Series I and II Cell Translations Applications Guide
401-660-106
Cellular Operations Systems
Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering Users Guide
401-660-108
Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Description, Operation, and Maintenance
401-660-115
AUTOPLEX System Application Schematic
SD2R236,
Issue 7
Storage Battery Lead-Acid Type Requirements and Procedures
157-601-701
J86928A Power Plant Maintenance
167-609-309
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-84
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions
Table 8-16.
Series II Cell Site - Related Documentation (Contd)
Document Title
Designation
J86928A Power Plant Description
167-609-310
J86928A Power Plant Rectifier Description
167-609-311
Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions
401-660-101
Cell Site Antenna Equipment Installation Planning Guide
401-200-300
System Routine and Corrective Maintenance
401-610-175
Cell Site I/O Manual
401-610-107
Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment
401-610-120
Compact Base Station Description, Operation, and Maintenance
401-660-060
Microcell Implementation, Installation, and Maintenance
401-661-111
Protective Grounding Systems Requirements
802-001-197
Electrical Protection of Radio Stations
876-210-100
Intro to Series II Compact Base Station
Customer
Information
Bulletin
(CIB)-182
Introduction to Microcell
CIB-191
Radio Channel Frame (Primary) Schematic Drawing
SD-2R263
Radio Channel Frame (Growth) Schematic Drawing
SD-2R264
Linear Amplifier Circuit Schematic Diagram
SD-2R265
Linear Amplifier Frame Schematic Drawing
SD-2R266
Antenna Interface Frame Schematic Drawing
SD-2R268
Series II Cell Site Schematic Drawing
SD-2R271
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
8-85
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
8-86
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9
Radios
Contents
■
Contents
9-1
■
Introduction
9-3
■
AMPS Radio Units and Personality Types
9-4
Radio Channel Unit (RCU)
9-4
Voice RCU (V-RCU)
9-5
Setup RCU (S-RCU)
9-6
Locate RCU (L-RCU)
9-6
Radio Test Unit (RTU)
■
9-7
TDMA Radio Units and Personality Types
9-8
Digital Radio Unit (DRU)
9-8
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU)
9-8
Digital Radio Personality Types
9-8
Digital Voice Radio
9-8
Digital Control Channel (DCCH) Radio
9-9
Digital Beacon Radio
9-9
Digital Locate Radio
9-9
DRU - Detailed Description
9-10
EDRU - Detailed Description
9-11
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-1
Radios
Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU)
Components
Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU)
Interfaces
9-14
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Reliability,
Federal Communications Commission (FCC), and
Safety Features
9-16
DRU/EDRU Power Supply
■
9-16
TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU)
9-17
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU),
Feature IDentification (FID) #2775
9-18
Cell Sites that can use the Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU)
9-18
Testing Supported by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU)
9-19
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Connectivity
9-19
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Testing of
C/T-EDRU, L-EDRU, and DCCH
9-21
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
Bit-Error Rate (BER)
9-21
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Power
Requirements
9-21
MSC and TI OA&M for the Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU)
9-22
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
401-660-100 Issue 11
9-16
Directional Setup and Beacon Channels
9-23
Pilot/Sync/Access Channel Element (CE)
9-24
Page CE
9-24
Traffic CE
9-24
Orthogonal-channel Noise Simulator CE
9-25
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-2
9-13
August 2000
Radios
Introduction
The RCFs contain slots into which cellular equipment and radios are inserted. The
P-RCF contains 4 shelves with 12 slots each and 1 shelf with 8 slots, for a total of
56 slots. Each Growth RCF has 6 shelves of 12 slots each for a total of 72 slots.
Altogether, an RFS has 200 equipment/radio slots.
Up to two 8-bit TDM buses (TDM bus 0 and TDM bus 1) connect the radio shelves
in the primary and Growth RCFs. TDM bus 0 serves 5 radio shelves (56 slots) in
the P-RCF and the 4 upper radio shelves (48 slots) in the first Growth RCF for a
total of 9 radio shelves (104 slots).
TDM bus 1 serves the 2 bottom radio shelves (24 slots) in the first growth frame
and the 6 radio shelves (72 slots) in the second growth frame for a total of 8 radio
shelves (96 slots).
Each of the 3 RCFs of an RFS can contain any combination of the following 3
types of radio units.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-3
Radios
AMPS Radio Units and Personality
Types
Radio Channel
Unit (RCU)
The RCU is the analog radio used with the Advanced Mobile Phone Service
(AMPS) system. The RCU occupies 1 slot on an RCF shelf. 1 RCU provides 1
analog channel. Because an RCU uses a single slot on a radio shelf, an RFS
fully-configured with RCUs can house 200 RCUs, including voice, setup, and
locate radios, providing 192 analog channels.
TECHNOLOGY
TYPE:
AMPS
HARDWARE
TYPE:
PERSONALITY
TYPE:
RCU
S-RCU
SBRCU
V-RCU
L-RCU
NVM IMAGE
Figure 9-1.
S-SBRCU
V-SBRCU
NVM IMAGE
RTU
L-SBRCU
RTU
NVM
IMAGE
AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
For the RCU radio type, there is one non-volatile memory (NVM) image file for the
setup radio (S-RCU), analog voice radio (V-RCU), and analog locate radio
(L-RCU). At initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other
specific parameter values to each RCU. There is another NVM image file for the
RTU.
For the SBRCU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the S-SBRCU,
V-SBRCU, and L-SBRCU. As of ECP Release 8.0, the Cell Site software
downloads a new NVM image file to the SBRCU, separate and distinct from the
NVM image file downloaded to the RCU.
The Radio Channel Unit (RCU) is a plug-in module containing all RF, baseband,
and control circuitry required to perform setup, locate, or voice channel functions.
The RCU function, its operating channel, transmit power level, and other specific
parameters are downloaded to each radio at initialization by the Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up." In addition, RCU
call-processing algorithms are contained in nonvolatile memory within each unit
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
and can be updated by the TDM bus, if necessary. The downloadable parameter
and nonvolatile memory update features allow remote reconfiguration of the RCU
and eliminate the need for many on-site visits.
The RCU also contains a Built-In Self Test (BIST) capability and a multifunction
front panel display. BIST routines are automatically executed at initialization and
the test results reported to the Radio Control Complex (RCC). The display
includes channel number, function, transmitter-on, standby, and failure indications.
Also, there is a front panel switch which allows the transmitter to be shut off by a
technician independent of automatic control command.
What follows is a brief description of each AMPS radio personality type:
■
Analog voice radio: Performs the analog voice function_carries one
over-the-air AMPS call.
■
Setup radio: Performs the analog setup function_establishes calls via the
analog control channel (ACC) with mobile subscribers using AMPS or
IS-54B compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles.
■
Analog locate radio: Performs the analog locate function. The Analog
locate radio assists with AMPS handoffs by measuring the mobile signal
strength and verifying the mobile supervisory audio tone (SAT).
Voice RCU (V-RCU)
The receiver section of a Voice Radio Channel Units (V-RCUs) receives Radio
Frequency (RF) input from the Cell Site receiving antenna (two inputs for
diversity). This input can be supplied from omni receiving antennas or from
receiving antennas on one of the faces of the directional antennas.
The Radio Channel Unit (RCU) receiver passes voice audio into its baseband
circuits where it is processed and applied through a trunk back to the Mobile
Switching Center (MSC). The data output from the receiver is applied to its data
decoder circuits where it is decoded and applied to the on-line Cell Site processor.
Data transmission on the receive voice channel is referred to as reverse
blank-and-burst data. During data transmission by the subscriber unit, the voice
channel is blanked for a small interval while a burst of data is sent. The voice
receivers also play a part in the handoff function by periodically making signal
measurements.
Voice signals to be transmitted are sent from the MSC by a trunk and applied to
the RCU where they are processed and applied to the RCU’s transmitter. The
modulated transmitter RF output is applied to the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAF) and
then through the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) to the antennas.
Data to be transmitted is applied from the on-line Cell Site processor to the data
encoder circuits on the RCU where it is formatted and applied to the transmitter for
transmission. Transmitter and receiver tuning is accomplished by a synthesizer
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-5
Radios
which is controlled by a common input. A 15.0-MHz synthesizer reference
frequency is applied from the Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) located in
the AIF.
An RCU or SBRCU having a voice radio personality may also have a beacon radio
personality. Thus, an RCU or SBRCU can serve two functions concurrently: (1)
carry an over-the-air AMPS call and (2) provide signal strength measurements for
the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff (MAHO) procedure. Since the RF carrier
power level remains fixed for beacon radios, the dual-personality RCU or SBRCU
is ineligible for dynamic power control.
Setup RCU (S-RCU)
Normally, two Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are designated as Setup Radio
Channel Units (S-RCUs). Setup radios perform the receive and transmit functions
required to set up a call. Because of the dual function (receiving and transmitting),
setup radios provide both paging and accessing functions. Paging refers to the
process of calling a cellular subscriber (Cell Site to cellular subscriber). Accessing
refers to the process of the cellular subscriber making a call (cellular subscriber to
Cell Site). The Radio Frequency (RF) output of the setup radios is amplified by the
Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) and then fed to the transmit antenna through the
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF).
With Release 4.3, the Simulcast Setup feature allowed setup radios to transmit
signals to all directional voice sectors and receive signals from all directional voice
sectors in a Cell Site using a single setup channel frequency. In this configuration,
a single setup channel serves the entire Cell Site. This contrasts with directional
setup for which each directional voice sector has its own setup channel and its
own pair of redundant setup radios. Simulcast setup also contrasts with
omnidirectional setup which requires an omnidirectional antenna and associated
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC).
Locate RCU (L-RCU)
Some Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are designated as "Locate"RCUs (L-RCUs).
L-RCUs perform the locate function required to determine if a handoff is needed.
Signal measurements are made periodically by the locate receivers within Cell
Sites adjacent to the Cell Site serving the subscriber’s unit. When it is determined
that an adjacent Cell Site can serve the subscriber better, a handoff is made to
that adjacent Cell Site.
Any of the RCUs may be designated a locating radio. Frequency control data is
applied to the receiver’s frequency synthesizer to tune the locating radio to the
channel being monitored. A reference frequency is supplied to the receiver’s
synthesizer from the Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) located in the
Antenna Interface Frame (AIF).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
Diversity receiving antennas are used for all omnidirectional and directional
antenna configurations. This means that each Cell Site RCU has two receiving
Radio Frequency (RF) inputs, referred to as 0 and 1.
Received signals from the Cell Site receiving antennas are applied to the switch/
combiner board in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF). The P-RCF is
wired to receive two omni receive inputs and two receive inputs from each
directional face. Use of these RF inputs depends upon the antenna configuration
options employed at the Cell Site. RF switches within the switch/combiner board
provide individual RF selection for each RCU. This means that up to two omni
receive inputs or directional receive inputs can be selected and applied to each
setup RCU and that the locating RCUs may receive up to either two omni receive
inputs or two directional receive inputs from any one of the directional faces. In
addition to the switchable antenna configuration provided by the switch/combiner
board, a fixed antenna configuration is also used.
Radio Test Unit
(RTU)
The Radio Test Unit (RTU) provides Radio Frequency (RF) testing of all Radio
Channel Units (RCU)s. Under software control, diagnostic test paths are
established to test and measure all major RF functional operations. The RTU
contains a test receiver and test generator which serve to simulate a subscriber’s
unit. The test receiver can be tuned to any subscriber’s receive channel, and the
test generator can be tuned to any subscriber’s transmit channel. Tuning is
accomplished by the RF test frequency control input to a transmit/receive
frequency synthesizer within the RTU. The reference frequency, supplied from the
internal Reference Frequency Generator (RFG), provides the synthesizer
reference. The RTU can be switched into a self-test mode to make a loop-around
test.
During receiver testing on an RCU, test data is encoded and applied from the
RTU. The test generator within the RTU is tuned to the channel under test, and
the output of the test generator is applied to the appropriate Cell Site receiving
antenna’s directional coupler. Control is applied to the Radio Test Unit Switch
Panel (RSP) in the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) to select the correct antenna.
The test generator can inject the test signal (as selected by the RTU) into either
the forward or reflected port of a directional coupler associated with the RCU
under test.
Test data injected into the reflected port of the directional coupler is seen by the
receiver under test as a normal incoming signal. The receive signal and data are
evaluated and the results sent to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). Test signals
injected into the forward port of the directional coupler are seen by the receiver
under test as a reflected input. Receiving antenna efficiency can be measured by
comparing (obtaining a ratio of) receive signal strength resulting from reflected
and forward signal injection.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-7
Radios
TDMA Radio Units and Personality
Types
The two types of TDMA digital radios are briefly explained below.
Digital Radio Unit
(DRU)
The DRU is the digital radio used with the Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
system. The DRU occupies 2 slots on an RCF shelf. The DRU supports 3
full-duplex Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) on one 30-kHz bandwidth RF channel
via Time-Division Multiplexing. Given that the DRU occupies 2 slots, the number
of DRUs that can be housed in the P-RCF is half the number of RCUs, which is 28
DRUs. For the 2 Growth RCFs, the number of DRUs that can be housed is also
half the number of RCUs, that is, 36 DRUs apiece. Altogether, an RFS
fully-configured with DRUs can house 99 DRUs, including voice and locate radios.
The software can support 256 DTCs. (Call setup is done by the DCCH with no
setup radios required). The DRU is tested using a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU).
Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit
(EDRU)
The EDRU is an enhanced version of the DRU that is fully backward compatible
with the DRU. The EDRU improves (i.e., enhances) many of the features offered
by the DRU. Additionally, the EDRU provides new features and capabilities that
the DRU cannot offer. The EDRU occupies 1 slot on an RCF shelf. That is, two
EDRUs can be installed for each DRU. Like the DRU, the EDRU supports 3 DTCs.
Each of the 3 channels can carry either Control information or Traffic (C/T).
Because the EDRU, like the RCU, occupies only 1 slot on a radio shelf, the
Primary RCF has enough radio slots for 56 EDRUs, and the Growth RCFs have
enough radio slots for 72 EDRUs apiece.
However, a 430AB power converter unit is required to support a maximum of 8
EDRUs per shelf. Additionally, due to software limitations, the maximum number of
EDRUs supported are:
Digital Radio
Personality Types
■
RCF0: 23 EDRUs
■
RCF1: 40 EDRUs
■
RCF2: 16 EDRUs
■
Total: 79 EDRUs The total number of EDRUs per cell should not exceed 79,
including voice and locate radios. Call setup is done by the DCCH with no
setup radios required. The EDRU is tested using a TRTU.
The following paragraphs provide a brief description of each TDMA radio
personality type:
Digital Voice Radio
Performs the digital traffic channel function_carries up to three over-the-air TDMA
calls.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
Digital Control Channel (DCCH) Radio
Performs the digital setup and short message service functions_ establishes calls
via the DCCH with mobile subscribers using IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS
dual-mode mobiles. The DCCH is carried on user channel 1. Typically, there is
one DCCH per physical antenna face, or sector, in a TDMA system.
Digital Beacon Radio
Performs the digital beacon channel function_transmits at a fixed level at all times
to provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure.
Typically, there is one beacon radio per physical antenna face in a TDMA system.
Digital Locate Radio
Performs the digital locate channel function_assists with handoffs when the
established TDMA call can be better served by an adjacent sector or cell by
measuring the signal strength and verifying the digital verification color code
(DVCC) of the IS-54B or IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile
targeted for handoff. The digital locate radio is instrumental in the DVCC
verification procedure.
For the DRU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the digital control channel
radio (D-DRU), digital voice radio (V-DRU), and digital beacon radio (B-DRU). At
initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other specific
parameter values to each DRU. There is another NVM image file for the digital
locate radio (L-DRU), and still another for the TRTU.
A DRU or EDRU provides a basic modulation efficiency of three user channels per
30-kHz of bandwidth. The three user channels are designated user channel 1,
user channel 2, and user channel 3. Each user channel is assigned one trunk
(DS0) on the T1 line and one duplex timeslot on the RCF internal TDM bus, which
is always installed "red stripe up."
A D-DRU or D-EDRU may also carry digital traffic and beacon channels. Thus, a
D-DRU or D-EDRU can serve three functions concurrently: (1) perform the digital
setup function_establish calls via the DCCH with mobile subscribers using IS-136
compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles, (2) carry one or two over-the-air
TDMA calls, and (3) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO
procedure. Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for DCCH radios, the
D-DRU or D-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control.
The EDRU, unlike the DRU, will be able to carry more than one DCCH. That is, in
a future release, an EDRU will be able to carry one, two, or three DCCHs.
A B-DRU or B-EDRU may also carry digital traffic channels. Thus, a B-DRU or
B-EDRU can serve two functions concurrently:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-9
Radios
(1) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure and
(2) carry one, two, or even three over-the-air TDMA calls. (A digital beacon
channel may double as a digital traffic channel.) Since the RF carrier power level
remains fixed for beacon radios, the B-DRU or B-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic
power control.
A V-DRU or V-EDRU may only carry digital traffic channels. A V-DRU or V-EDRU
can carry one, two, or three digital traffic channels.
An L-DRU may only carry digital locate channels. An L-DRU can carry one, two, or
three digital locate channels.
DRU - Detailed
Description
The Digital Radio Unit (DRU) is the digital radio used with the Time-Division
Multiple Access (TDMA) system. The DRU is entirely digital, self contained,
comes with all the software needed to support TDMA, and does not need any
additional equipment to support call processing.
The DRU plugs into the same connectors as the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) that is
used with AMPS Systems. However, whereas the RCU occupies 1 slot in a Radio
Channel Frame (RCF), the DRU occupies 2 slots in an RCF. Then again, the RCU
provides only 1 analog channel, whereas the DRU supports 3 full-duplex Digital
Traffic Channels (DTCs) on one 30-kHz bandwidth RF channel via Time-Division
Multiplexing. The DRU can support control information (DCCH) on 1 of its
channels and (voice) Traffic on the other 2 channels. If the Cell Site supports the
Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature, the DCCH will perform the setup function
for digital calls and no setup radios will be required. (Setup radios will still be
required for analog calls).
The DRU’s dimensions are nominally 8 inches high by 3 inches wide by 14 inches
deep. Although the DRU is twice as wide as the RCU and occupies 2 slots as
compared with 1 slot for the RCU, DRUs and RCUs can sit side-by-side on the
same RCF shelf.
The combination of DRUs and RCUs allowed on a 12-slot RCF shelf is as follows:
(2 x Number of DRUs) + (Number of RCUs) = 12 slots
The Radio Test Unit (RTU) shelf of an RCF contains 8 available slots. Therefore,
the combination of DRUs and RCUs allowed on the 8-slot RCF is as follows:
(2 x Number of DRUs) + (Number of RCUs) = 8 slots
The placement of DRUs on a radio shelf in constrained as follows. While the DRU
uses 2 RCU slots, it makes contact with only 1 backplane slot. That slot is the one
on the left if one is viewing the equipment from the front. To place the maximum
number of DRUs on a shelf, the DRU must be installed so that it makes contact
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
with the even-numbered RCU slot. On an RCU shelf, for example, the valid
locations for 6 DRUs would be RCU slots 0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 8-9, and 10-11. The
connections would be at slots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10.
On RCF shelves containing 12 RCU slots, +5 Volts DC power is provided by 1 of 2
units; The 415 AA DC/DC unit and the 415 AC DC/DC unit. The power converter
used depends on the combination of RCU and DRU/EDRU units on the shelf.
Table 9-1.
415 AA/AC DC/DC Power Unit
415AA DC/DC power supply
415 AC DC/DC power unit
DRUs/EDRUs
RCUs
DRUs/EDRUs
RCUs
1 DRU/EDRU
10 RCUs
4 DRUs/EDRUs
4 RCUs
2 DRUs/EDRUs
8 RCUs
5 DRUs/EDRUs
2 RCUs
3 DRUs/EDRUs
6 RCUss
6 DRUs/EDRUs
0 RCUs
An important feature that increases the flexibility of the system and protects your
investment in the DRU is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from
the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This makes it quick and easy to
accommodate future revisions in the IS-54A standard and reduces down-time for
upgrades.
The DRU consists of 2 modules. One is the Signal Processing Module (SPM),
which contains 3 circuit boards. The other is the Transceiver Circuit Module
(TCM), which contains one circuit board. The DRU is tested using a TDMA Radio
Test Unit (TRTU). The DRU faceplate provides a channel display and LED status
indicators.
The DRU is also used to support the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature. For
information regarding how the DRU is used to support the DCCH, please see the
appropriate section in this document.
EDRU - Detailed
Description
The Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is an enhanced version of the Digital
Radio Unit (DRU) that is used with Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
systems. The EDRU is fully back-compatible with the DRU and can perform all the
functions of a DRU. When the EDRU is used to perform the same functions that a
DRU performs, it uses the same commands.
Like the DRU, the EDRU supports 3 full-duplex Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) on
one RF channel via Time-Division Multiplexing. However, the EDRU occupies only
1 radio slot, whereas the DRU occupies 2. The EDRU’s dimensions are nominally
those of the Radio Channel Unit (RCU):
Height: 7.67 inches.
Width: 1.5 inches.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-11
Radios
Depth: 14.15 inches, including the connector and face plate that extends
from the EDRU.
Depth: 13.86 inches, excluding the connector and face plate that extends
from the EDRU.
RCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs can sit side-by-side on the same RCF shelf.
If the Cell Site supports the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature, the DCCH
will perform the setup function for digital calls and no setup radios will be required.
(Setup radios will still be required for analog calls).
The Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Systems that support Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Implementation are the Series II, IIm (mini), IImm
(micro-cell), IIe (enhanced), Compact Base Station (CBS), and Personal
Communications Services (PCS) TDMA Minicell.
The EDRU complies with the standards that define control, traffic, and data
operations for both cellular and PCS TDMA systems. Unless explicitly stated
otherwise, the EDRU contains all features specified in this document for both
cellular and PCS operations. The EDRU is software-configurable as the 2 radio
types that follow:
1.
Control/Traffic radio (C/T-EDRU) When the EDRU is configured as a C/
T-EDRU it supports DCCH or DTC func-tionality in any combination for any
of the 3 full-duplex channels it provides. The C/T-EDRU supports DTC
structure for the forward and reverse digital traffic channels as defined in
the standards for TDMA frame format, time-slot format, data rate, and
timing relationships. The C/T-EDRU supports the following config-urations
for DTC and DCCH on the same RF carrier.
Table 9-2.
C/T EDRU Configurations
C/T EDRU Configurations
Configuration
Time Slot 1
Time Slot 2
Time Slot 3
DTC
DTC
DTC
DCCH
DTC
DTC
2.
■
Digital Verification Color Code (DVCC) detection
■
Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Estimates. In addition, the
EDRU can perform any of these functions for PCS systems if
external frequency conversion is provided.
Locate Radio (L-EDRU)
The Locate Radio performs the following:
■
Diagnostics and Functional Tests
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
■
Power level measurements
Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Components
The two modules in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU), and the functions
they perform, are outlined below:
1.
Transceiver Circuit Module (TCM):
a.
The EDRU’s TCM uses a transmitter to:
■
Up-convert baseband signals from the Signal Processing
Module (SPM) to digitally modulated Radio Frequency (RF)
signals
■
Send the digitally modulated RF signals to the RF output
ports
The transmitter’s 4 components are:
— Up-Converter
— Amplifiers
— Filters
— Power Control Circuits
b.
The EDRU’s TCM uses a receiver to:
■
Down-convert digitally modulated RF signals from the RF
input ports to baseband signals.
■
Send the baseband signals to the demodulator (SPM).
The receiver’s 4 major components are:
— Down-Converter
— Amplifiers
— Filters
— Gain Control Circuits
The TCM contains the EDRU RF circuitry and uses the power
converter voltages below:
2.
■
+12 VDC-RF
■
-12 VDC power converter voltages.
Signal Processing Module (SPM): Contains the EDRU’s digital circuitry.
The major components in the SPM are the Digital Signal Processors
(DSPs) that perform the necessary functions by exe-cuting the code stored
in the firmware. The functions of the SPM are:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-13
Radios
■
Communicating with the Radio Channel Complex (RCC) via the
Time Division Multiplex (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red
stripe up." The EDRU provides the capability to transmit uplink
(EDRU to RCC) messages and to receive downlink (RCC to EDRU)
messages over the TDM bus.
■
Supervising TCM Operations
■
Speech Coding and De coding
■
Channel Coding and Decoding
■
Interleaving and De-Interleaving
■
Formatting and Deformatting
■
Modulating and Demodulating
■
Providing Equalization
■
Providing Echo Cancellation
■
Providing Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Estimates.
The three functions listed below are performed differently for Digital Traffic
Channels (DTCs) and Digital Control CHannels (DCCHs).
1.
Channel Coding/Decoding
2.
Interleaving/De-Interleaving
3.
Formatting/Deformatting Features. The SPM contains the EDRU
Digital Circuitry, and it uses the power converter voltages below:
■
+12 VDC
■
-12 VDC
■
+5 VDC
To prevent noise from disturbing the RF circuitry, no digital circuitry in the
entire system is permitted to use the +12 VDC-RF power converter voltage,
which is different from the +12 VDC.
The EDRU heat dissipation does not exceed 43.9 W.
Series II Cell Site,
Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit
(EDRU) Interfaces
The Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Backplane
Connection features Fastech backplane connectors in the Radio Channel Frame
(RCF) that provide the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) with the 4 following
interfaces:
1.
Radio Frequency (RF)
■
To provide receive diversity, the EDRU has 2 external RF input
(receive) ports via backplane connections.
■
The EDRU has 1 external RF output (transmit) port via a backplane
con-nection.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
2.
Reference Frequency
■
3.
The EDRU has 1 external reference frequency input port via a
backplane connection.
DC Power
The EDRU operates appropriately when all its supply voltages are within
5% of their nominal values. The maximum EDRU current drain on supply
voltages of the 4 interfaces is as follows:
4.
■
Current drain for +12 VDC-RF source is 1.0 A
■
Current drain for -12 VDC source is 0.2 A
■
Current drain for +12 VDC source is 0.2 A
■
Current drain for +5 VDC source is 5.0 A
Digital Signal
The EDRU has an external TDM bus interface to connect to the TDM bus via the
backplane. The TDM bus is always installed "red stripe up."
In the Series II and Series IIe Cell Sites, the EDRU is connected to either TDM
bus 0 or TDM bus 1, depending on where the EDRU is installed in the frame. Each
TDM bus has 2 sides, an "A side"and a "B side,"for redundancy. Only 1 side is
active at any given time. TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
In other systems, that are not Series II or Series IIe Cell Sites, the EDRU is
connected to only 1 TDM bus. That TDM bus also has an "A side"and a "B side."
The interfaces specified here are for the 2 sides of whichever TDM bus is serving
the EDRU. The EDRU uses the active TDM bus to communicate with the RCC.
Environmental Features:
■
Internal Cabinet Temperature: From 0x C to 65x C.
■
Humidity: From 5% relative humidity to the lesser of 95% relative humidity
or 0.024 g water vapor per gram of dry air over the internal cabinet
temperature range.
■
Altitude: From 200 feet below sea level to 10,000 feet above sea level.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-15
Radios
Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit
(EDRU)
Reliability, Federal
Communications
Commission
(FCC), and Safety
Features
The following lists the EDRU reliability, FCC and safety features:
■
The reliability of the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is less than 2500
FIT, equating to a MTBF of 400,000 hours.
■
The useful lifetime of the EDRU is 7 years.
■
The EDRU complies with the applicable features in Part 2, Part 15, and
Part 22 of the FCC regulations.
■
The EDRU in conjunction with the up-bander complies with the applicable
fea-tures in Part 24 of the FCC regulations.
■
The EDRU is UL-1950 approved.
DRU/EDRU Power Supply
On RCF shelves containing 12 RCU slots, +5 Volts DC power is provided by 1 of 2
units; The 415 AA DC/DC unit and the 415 AC DC/DC unit. The power converter
used depends on the combination of RCU and DRU/EDRU units on the shelf. For
the purposes of the table below, the DRU and EDRU are equivalent. An important
feature that increases the flexibility of the system and protects your investment in
the DRU is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from the.
Table 9-3.
415 AA/AC DC/DC Power Unit
415AA DC/DC power supply
415 AC DC/DC power unit
DRUs/EDRUs
RCUs
DRUs/EDRUs
RCUs
1 DRU/EDRU
10 RCUs
4 DRUs/EDRUs
4 RCUs
2 DRUs/EDRUs
8 RCUs
5 DRUs/EDRUs
2 RCUs
3 DRUs/EDRUs
6 RCUss
6 DRUs/EDRUs
0 RCUs
An important feature that increases the flexibility of the system and protects your
investment in the DRU is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from
the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This makes it quick and easy to
accommodate future revisions in the IS-54A standard and reduces down-time for
upgrades.
The DRU consists of 2 modules. One is the Signal Processing Module (SPM),
which contains 3 circuit boards. The other is the Transceiver Circuit Module
(TCM), which contains one circuit board. The DRU is tested using a TDMA Radio
Test Unit (TRTU). The DRU faceplate provides a channel display and LED status
indicators.
The DRU is also used to support the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature.
Directional Setup
and Beacon
Channels
Only a Radio Channel Unit (RCU) can be used for analog setup, but a DRU/EDRU
may be used for digital setup. When the directional setup option is chosen, the
entire LAC and antenna system previously used for omnidirectional setup may be
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
eliminated. Directional setup radios use the same antennas as do the voice
radios. When there is directional setup in a cell, the mobile-assisted handoff
feature of the DMMS transceivers scans the directional setup channels or the
beacon channels to determine a candidate list of faces to hand off to.
Omnidirectional setup is an option to the service provider. However, after Release
5.0, if omnidirectional setup is implemented in a Cell Site with directional voice
sectors, then beacon channels must be provided to support the mobile-assisted
handoff capability for DMMSs. With no directional setup in a Cell Site, the DMMSs
scan the beacon radio frequencies for that Cell Site. A beacon channel is provided
by a designated voice radio which transmits its carrier at a constant power level.
Each antenna sector in a Cell Site must be allocated one beacon channel.
Beacon channels are provided at the request of the service provider and are
required only when the Cell Site has directional voice with omni setup, or when the
Cell Site is equipped entirely with analog RCUs and the neighboring Cell Site is
equipped with digital channels.
Other setup options are simulcast setup or DCCH setup.
Setup radios are installed in the top radio shelves of the P-RCF. Normally, at
start-up, two setup radios (one active and one standby) are used.
TDMA Radio Test
Unit (TRTU)
The TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) is a plug-in unit required in the P-RCF to test
the Digital Radio Units (DRUs) and other DRU-related equipment. It is one of
several test units in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF). The RTU tests
the analog Radio Control Units (RCUs).
The TRTU is composed of two functional groups
1.
the Transceiver Functional Group and the
2.
Signal Processing Functional Group.
The Transceiver Functional Group tests RF-related functions. The Signal
Processing Functional Group tests baseband speech processing, speech,
channel and message coding, equalization, and communication. The TRTU
exchanges messages with other equipment in the P-RCF via a TDM bus, which is
always installed "red stripe up."
The RTU Control Board (RCB) is used to multiplex the communication between
the RTU and TRTU and the RTU Switch Panel (RSP). The RSP allows the
appropriate test unit, TRTU or RTU, to test the DRU or RCU, respectively. There is
a cabling kit to route the RF signals to and from the appropriate test unit. Frames
ordered from the factory come with the option built in. For frames already in the
field, there is a package available for field installation.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-17
Radios
Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit
(T-EDRU), Feature
IDentification
(FID) #2775
Cell Sites that can use the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
This chapter covers the "Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)"feature,
which has Feature IDentification (FID) #2775. The Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU) is a more advanced alternative to the older TDMA Radio Test Unit
(TRTU) for testing EDRUs, but not DRUs. The T-EDRU may be used in all Series
II Classic, Series IIe, Series IIm, Series IImm and PCS TDMA Minicell Products
that are equipped with EDRUs only. The functionality on the TDMA Radio Test
Unit (TRTU), which is used to test DRUs and EDRUs, is identically replicated on
the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU). However, the Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) takes up half the space of the TRTU and is used to
test EDRUs only.
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is identical in terms of hardware
and physical size to the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU). The only difference
between it and the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is that a different
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) software/firmware image is downloaded into it from
the Radio Control Complex (RCC) over the Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus,
which is always installed "red stripe up."
Table 9-4.
Placement and Use of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
Dimensions and Placement
TRTU
T-EDRU
Height
8.00 inches
8.00 inches
Depth
14.15 inches
14.15 inches
Width
3.00 inches
3.00 inches
Test Capability
TRTU (Tests DRUs and EDRUs)
T-EDRU (Tests EDRUs only)
SBRCU slots used
4 SBRCU slots
2 SBRCU slots
RCU slots used
2 RCU slots
1 RCU slot
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) and the TDMA Radio Test Unit
(TRTU) are not supported in the same base station at the same time. Only one
TDMA test radio, either the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) or the Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is required per base station. One Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is enough to test the Enhanced Digital Radio Units
(EDRUs) in one or more radio frames, equipped with EDRUs only, within a single
cell site. Like the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU), the Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU) is located in the radio test slot of the Primary Radio Channel
Frame (P-RCF) at the cell site. Because only 1 Test Radio is used per cell site, if it
fails, all diagnostic testing that requires the Test Radio must be suspended.
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is placed in the 2 lower
numbered Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus addresses currently used by the
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) for all Series II products and the TDMA PCS
Minicell. TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Only in the case of the Series IImm can a Control/Traffic Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (C/T-EDRU) or a Locate EDRU (L-EDRU) be allowed to occupy and operate
in the 2 higher numbered Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus addresses, which
are also the 2 available Single Board Radio Channel Unit (SBRCU) slots next to
the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU). This capability is not supported
on other products. The 2 slots for the Control/Traffic in the Series II mm have been
designed to support receive and transmit functions to these backplane slots. Also,
the amplification scheme in the Series IImm products allow for the addition of
another radio.
Testing Supported by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is functionally backward
compatible with the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). Additionally, it supports all
functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing of the following:
■
Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs) (In Any Configuration)
■
Radio Frequency (RF) Switches
■
Transmit Antennas
■
Receive Antennas
■
Lightwave Microcell Transceiver (LMT)
■
Lightwave Microcell Transceiver (LMT) Optical Link.
Functional tests are performed when a radio is in service. Diagnostic and
measurement tests are performed when a radio is out of service.
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Self-Test
As part of Lucent’s maintenance strategy, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
(T-EDRU) tests itself before it tests the other radios. The self-diagnostics
performed by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) include measuring
the following:
■
Transmit Power Level
■
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Integrity
■
Time Alignment
■
Radio Frequency (RF) Signals on the Switchable Shelf
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Connectivity
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) simulates a mobile station in
order to test the TDMA radios and any other TDMA related equipment in the cell
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-19
Radios
site. Failures are treated the same as a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The Test
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) provides a control lead and an RS-422
interface to the Radio Test Unit (RTU) Communications Board (RCB). The Radio
Test Unit (RTU) Communications Board (RCB) is used to provide Radio
Frequency (RF) connectivity to the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch panel.
Radio Control Complex (RCC) Generic Maintenance Software Capability 0
Generic maintenance software in the Radio Control Complex (RCC) can:
■
Control the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) transmit and
receive antenna switches.
■
Transmit Radio Frequency (RF) signals to TDMA radios located on
switchable shelves to test the receive paths through the antenna switches.
■
Transmit Radio Frequency (RF) signals directly to TDMA radios, then to the
receive antennas, for performing return loss measurements.
■
Measure digital voice radios for transmit and receive power level testing.
■
Perform transmit power level/RSSI integrity self tests.
■
Perform a voice band signal processing/transmission level adjustment test
in the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) using a tone sent to the
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) over the Time-Division
Multiplexed (TDM) bus, transmitted and received within the Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), and returned to the Time-Division Multiplexed
(TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up."
■
Perform new functions associated with digital radios and the fiber optic
transmis-sion system.
■
Perform internal Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) loop-back
tests.
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Transmit Testing
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), like the TDMA Radio Test Unit
(TRTU), tests TDMA signals in both the transmit and receive directions. For tests
in the transmit direction, a radio in the Radio Control Frame injects signals into the
forward transmission path. A directional coupler couples attenuated Radio
Frequency (RF) signals proportional to the incident and reflected power in the
antenna path back to the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) for
measurement. The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) reports the
measurements back to the Radio Control Complex (RCC) for processing and
analysis. The Radio Frequency (RF) connectivity of the Test Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit (T-EDRU) supports functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Transmit Testing
For tests of performance in the receive direction, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU) functions as a transmitter and injects an Radio Frequency (RF)
signal through a face selector switch into a directional coupler and finally to the
antenna. A radio in the radio frame then measures the Radio Frequency (RF)
signal strength it receives and passes the measurements to the Radio Control
Complex (RCC) for processing and analysis. When the Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (EDRU) is in receive mode, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
supports functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing.
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Testing of C/T-EDRU,
L-EDRU, and DCCH
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) supports all functional,
diagnostic, and measurement testing of the Control/Traffic (C/T-EDRU) and the
Locate EDRU (L-EDRU).
When it performs Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) functional testing, the Test
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) transmits on one time slot only. Not
transmitting on the other time slots minimizes the interference during Digital
Control CHannel (DCCH) testing.
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Bit-Error Rate (BER)
The Bit-Error Rate (BER) of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) with
diversity on does not exceed 1% under the following conditions:
■
The carrier to noise ratio is 30 dB or higher.
■
The delay interval is zero
■
The Radio Frequency (RF) input signal is static, and its power level is within
the dynamic range of the receiver.
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Power Requirements
The Radio Control Complex (RCC) software handles the difference in power
outputs when a Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is substituted for a
TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
and Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) are designed to operate at attenuation 0
setting at a nominal power level of +10 dBm with a minimum adjustable range
using the faceplate potentiometer of +/- 3 db over environmental conditions. The
maximum transmit power from the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
could be as great as +15 dBm before calibration by a technician. A technician is
required to adjust the potentiometer on the front panel of the Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) to ensure it is set to +10 dBm at attenuation 0 when
installed. The power output level of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
(T-EDRU) is +10 dBm instead of +4 dBm as it was in the TDMA Radio Test Unit
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-21
Radios
(TRTU). Code in the Radio Control Complex (RCC) subtracts 6 dB from all Radio
Frequency (RF) signals transmitted by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
(T-EDRU).
MSC and TI OA&M for the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
The Mobile Switching Center (MSC) can perform the same functions on the Test
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) that it performs on the TDMA Radio Test
Unit (TRTU). The system operator can check the status of the Test Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), remove it from service, perform diagnostics on it,
and return it back to service using the same Technician Interface (TI) commands
that are used for the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). Operation, Administration,
and Maintenance (OA&M) operations that can be performed on the Test
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) include:
■
Checking status
■
Removing (Take out of service manually)
■
Take out of service automatically for routine diagnostics.
■
Restore (Bring back to service and reset all parameters used to control it)
Aside from the wide range of testing that the Test Enhanced Digital Radio
Unit (T-EDRU) brings to the service provider, it allows the Series IImm to
add another Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) to its Primary Radio
Channel Frame (P-RCF) to increase control or traffic channel capacity.
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Activation Not Required
The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is not activated by a Feature
Activation File (FAF). The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is activated
by simply replacing a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) with a Test Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit (T-EDRU). That is, placing the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit
(T-EDRU) in the test radio slot in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF).
RC/V Configuration of Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)
Recent Change & Verify (RC/V) allows the technician to equip and configure the
Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) in the same way that the TDMA Radio
Test Unit (TRTU) is configured.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and
Personality Types
For each CDMA cluster (one CCC managing up to seven CCUs), there is one
NVM image file for the CCC, another for the pilot/sync/access (P/S/A) CE
personality, another for the page CE personality, another for the traffic CE
personality, and still another for the orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS)
CE personality. At initialization, the CCC downloads the personality-type image
files and other specific parameter values into active memory of the CCUs_the
CCC downloads exactly one personality-type image file to each CCU CE. There is
another NVM image file for the BBA, another for the CRTUi, and still another for
the SCT.
The CCU contains two on-board CEs. Thus, a CCC can manage up to 14 CEs.
For the cellular band class (850 MHz), the TIA IS-95A standard defines two
common carriers: the primary CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel
283 for System A (A band) and 384 for System B (B band), and the secondary
CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel 691 for System A (A’ band) and
777 for System B (B’ band). Each CDMA omni cell or cell sector must be assigned
at least one common carrier. For the PCS band class (1900 MHz), candidates for
common CDMA carriers range from channel numbers 25 to 1175 in increments of
25.
Each common CDMA carrier (primary, secondary) on an antenna face has one
CE configured as the P/S/A CE and another configured as the page CE. The two
CEs may be on the same CCU or on different CCUs within the same CDMA
cluster.
The following paragraphs provide a brief description of each CDMA CE
personality type:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-23
Radios
TECHNOLOGY
TYPE:
HARDWARE
TYPE:
CDMA
CCC
CCU
NVM
IMAGE
CE
BCR*
CE
BIU*
ACU*
NVM
IMAGE
CRTUi
SCT
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
* BCR-BIU-ACU = BBA
PERSONALITY
TYPE:
P/S/A CE
PAGE CE
TRAFFIC CE
OCNS CE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
Figure 9-2.
Pilot/Sync/Access
Channel Element
(CE)
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
The CE Performs part of the CDMA call setup function_establishes calls with
mobile subscribers using IS-95A or IS-95B compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode
mobiles.
The pilot channel is an unmodulated, direct-sequence spread-spectrum signal
transmitted continuously by each sector of a CDMA cell. It allows the mobile to
acquire the timing of the forward control channels and provides a coherent carrier
phase reference for demodulating the sync and paging channels.
The sync channel provides time-of-day and frame synchronization to the mobile.
The mobile uses this channel to acquire cell and sector-specific information.
The access channel is a CDMA reverse channel used for short signaling message
exchange such as mobile registration, mobile call origination, and response to
pages. The access channel is a slotted random access channel used by mobiles
to communicate to the Cell Site.
Page CE
Performs part of the CDMA call setup function_transmits control information to
idle mobiles during mobile powerup and when a mobile is acquiring a new Cell
Site. It conveys pages to the mobiles.
Traffic CE
Performs the CDMA traffic channel function_carries one over-the-air CDMA call. A
traffic channel, which is a communication path between a mobile station and a
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Radios
Cell Site, carries user and signaling information. The term traffic channel implies a
forward and reverse pair.
Orthogonal-chann
el Noise Simulator
CE
Simulates a specified number of mobile users operating in a specified sector on a
specified carrier. OCNS allows generation of a simulated user load on the CDMA
forward channels in order to assist in verifying the capacity of the CDMA system.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
9-25
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
9-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10
Antenna Hardware Configurations
Contents
■
Contents
10-1
■
Introduction
10-3
■
Fixed Antenna Connection Configuration
10-5
3-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching
Configuration
10-8
6-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching with
Dual-Radio Solution
10-9
3- or 6-Sector Directional Antenna Switching with
Simulcast Setup
10-9
All-Omnidirectional Configuration
10-9
All-Directional Configuration
10-10
Radio Transmission and Reception
10-13
RF Transmitter Interfaces
10-13
RF Receiver Interfaces
10-14
2 Branch Intelligent Antenna,
Feature IDentification (FID) #3145
10-14
What “2 Branch” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
10-14
How the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is used to
support 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
10-15
What “Intelligent” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
10-15
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-1
Antenna Hardware Configurations
The Adaptive Interference Rejection Technique
Performance with 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
10-15
2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Phased Release
10-16
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
10-15
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
Introduction
The Series II Cell Site accommodates up to seven antenna faces, thus permitting
implementation of omnidirectional, 3-sector (120 degrees per sector), 6-sector (60
degrees per sector), or other special antenna configurations. Each antenna face
has an antenna set, which typically consists of one transmit antenna and two
(diversity) receive antennas.
There are two basic antenna types:
1.
Omnidirectional antennas—antennas having an omnidirectional pattern.
Omnidirectional antennas are approximately 14 feet high and 3 inches in
diameter. They are typically mounted at the corners of a 3-sided platform at
the top of a free-standing steel mast.
2.
Directional antennas—antennas having a unidirectional pattern.
Directional antennas usually have higher gain than omnidirectional
antennas.
There are two basic directional antenna types: the 120-degree directional
antenna, which covers a 120-degree sector in a given cell, and the 60degree directional antenna, which covers a 60-degree sector in a given
cell.
The directional antennas are mounted on each side (face) of a 3-sided or
6-sided platform at the top of a free-standing steel mast.
Omni cells are Cell Sites using omnidirectional antennas. Sector cells are Cell
Sites using directional antennas. An omni-configured system costs significantly
less per customer (mobile user) than a sectored installation.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-3
Antenna Hardware Configurations
NW
NE
0°
315° 45°
W 270° 90° E
225° 135°
180°
SW
SE
α
α
γ
β
ζ
β
ε
γ
δ
OMNI Directional
Antenna Configuration
ALL-Directional, 3-Sector
Antenna Configuration
ANT Face DESG
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
DELTA
EPSILON
ZETA
ALL-Directional, 6-Sector
Antenna Configuration
Greek Symbol
Sector Number
α
β
γ
δ
ε
ζ
Figure 10-1. Series II Cell Site Antenna Configurations
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
In addition to the two basic antenna types listed above, there is a new 2-branch
intelligent antenna type. The 2-branch intelligent antenna will be the third type of
antenna discussed.
Fixed Antenna
Connection
Configuration
Shelves equipped for the fixed antenna connection option (see Figure 10-2) can
be used in frames where all the Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are connected to an
omni antenna or connected to directive antennas, or in frames that have some
RCUs connected to omni antennas and some connected to directive antennas.
On shelves with the fixed antenna connection configuration, power combiners and
dividers interface 3 radio groups of 4 radios each.
For the transmit direction, the grouping on each shelf is by 4:1 RF power
combiners located on a BBN2 circuit board. The output of each combiner is
cabled to the Interconnection Panel Assembly where it is connected to 9:1 power
combiners for transmission to the LAFs. In this arrangement, the 9:1 combiners
can accommodate up to nine groups of four RCUs for a total of 36; they can also
handle up to seven antennas, which can be directive, omni, or a combination of
the two.
There is a test port on each 9:1 combiner through which the power level in each
channel signal can be measured with either a Radio Frequency (RF) power meter
having a tunable front end or a spectrum analyzer. The coupling loss between the
main output and the test port is 20 ± 0.5 dB.
For the Simulcast Setup feature with macrocell only (a macrocell is a Series II
antenna sector), the transmit path (see Figure 10-3) uses a 1:6 divider in Series
with a nominal 2-dB RF pad. The 1:6 divider is used to split the setup radio signals
to each sector antenna. The combined loss of the RF pad and 1:6 splitter is
almost the same as the loss of the 9:1 combiners that feed signals to the LACs.
The two setup radios used for Simulcast must be located in positions that are
each powered by a different power unit and served by the same shelf 4:1
combiner.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-5
Antenna Hardware Configurations
DIV 01
/ Rx RF SIG
Rx ANT "0"
(OMNI)
DIV 01
1:9
RF PWR
DVDR
1:4
RF PWR
DVDR
Rx ANT "1"
(ALPHA)
DIV 01
DIV 01
/ Rx RF SIG
DIV 01
/ Rx RF SIG
DIV 01
/ Rx RF SIG
Rx ANT "2"
(BETA)
DIV 01
ROM
NT
NTF
RAMES
RCU
RCU
RCU
RCU
Rx ANT "3"
(GAMMA)
DIV 01
RCU
RCU
Rx ANT "4"
(DELTA)
DIV 01
RCU
Rx ANT "5"
(EPSILON)
DIV 01
RCU
RCU
Rx ANT "6"
(ZETA)
DIV 01
RCU
10
RCU
11
NC
P/O
INTERCONNECTION
ASSEMBLY
DIV 01
/ RF RCVR/DVDR
BOARD
P/O
PRIMARY/GROWTH
RCF
P/O
NON-SWITCHABLE
RCU SHELF
A. FIXED ANTENNA CONNECTION
Figure 10-2. Interconnection Panel Assembly
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-6
RCU
0/
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
OMNI RX-DIVERSITY 0
TEST
COUPLER
BANDPASS
FILTER
CAL
SIG
NOTCH
FILTER
LOW-NOISE
PRE-AMPLIFIER
COUPLER
1:6
RF
SPLITTER
OMNI RX-DIVERSITY 1
1:6
FROM
ANTENNAS
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
DELTA
EPSILON
TO
RADIO
FRAME
SET
ZETA RX-DIVERSITY 0
1:6
ZETA RX-DIVERSITY 1
1:6
P/O AIF
Figure 10-3. Antenna Interface
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-7
Antenna Hardware Configurations
ANT "0"
(OMNI)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
ANT "1"
(ALPHA)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
P/O
INTERCONN
ASSEM
DIV 0/1 RF RCVR AMPL/4X12 SWITCH/CMBR BOARD
1:12
RF PWR
DVDR
1:9
RF PWR
DVDR
OMNI
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
SW-0
SW-1
SW-11
ANT "5"
(EPSILON)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
1:12
RF PWR
DVDR
1:9
RF PWR
DVDR
OMNI
DELTA
EPSILON
ZETA
SW-0
RX RF SIG
SW-11
P/O
INTERCONNECTION
ASSEMBLY
RCU
RX RF SIG
SW CONT SIG
ANT "6"
(ZETA)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
RCU
11
SHELF "2"
(RCU SWITCHABLE SHELF)
SW CONT SIG
SW-1
RCU
RX RF SIG
SW CONT SIG
DIV 0/1 RF RCVR AMPL/4X12 SWITCH/CMBR BOARD
RCU
RX RF SIG
SW CONT SIG
ANT "3"
(GAMMA)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
ANT "4"
(DELTA)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
RX RF SIG
SW CONT SIG
ANT "2"
(BETA)
DIV 0/1
RX SIG IN
ROM
NT
NTF
RAMES
SHELF "1"
(RCU SWITCHABLE SHELF)
RCU
RX RF SIG
SW CONT SIG
RCU
11
P/O DUAL-SHELF RCU ASSEMBLY
P/O PRIMARY RCF
(B) SWITCHABLE ANTENNA CONNECTION
Figure 10-4. Primary RCF Switch Antenna Connector
3-Sector Directive
Plus Omni
Antenna
Switching
Configuration
This description pertains to setup and locate radios only. In this configuration, the
switchable antenna connection option is used for the receive path (see
Figure 10-4). With the switchable antenna connection option, each Radio Channel
Unit (RCU) on the shelf can switch receive paths to any one of 4 available
antennas. Receive inputs from the AIFs are coupled through 1:9 RF power
dividers in the Interconnection Panel Assembly to 1:12 power dividers on a BBM1
circuit board on the RCU shelf. One board is used for each of the two diversities.
Each board has 12 single-pole, four-position Radio Frequency (RF) switches.
Each switch is associated with and controlled by an RCU.
The control lines to the switches in the two receive diversity paths associated with
the same RCU are connected in parallel and, therefore, controlled simultaneously.
Fixed antenna connections are used in the transmit path.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
6-Sector Directive
Plus Omni
Antenna
Switching with
Dual-Radio
Solution
This description pertains to setup and locate radios only. In this configuration (see
Figure 10-4), the hardware on the two shelves is the same as it is in the 3-sector
configuration; the differences are in the way the connections are made to the
AIFs. Fixed antenna connections are used for the transmit paths, and the
switchable antenna connection option is used for each of the two diversities in the
receive paths.
Inputs from the Omni antenna and directive antennas 1 through 6 are coupled
through 1:9 RF power dividers on the Interconnection Panel Assembly to BBM1
circuit boards on the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) shelves. One BBM is used for
each of the two diversities. The BBM1 boards on shelf 1 are connected to the
interface circuits of the Omni antenna and to directive antennas 1 through 3; the
boards on shelf 2 are connected to the Omni antenna and to directive antennas 4
through 6.
3- or 6-Sector
Directional
Antenna
Switching with
Simulcast Setup
In this configuration (see Figure 10-5), the hardware on the two shelves is the
same as it is in the omni setup 3- or 6-sector configurations; the difference is that
an omni antenna is not required for the setup radios. For 3-sector configurations,
the “simulated omni” signal is connected from a 6:1 combiner in AIF0 to a
connector in the RCF Interconnection Panel Assembly and through a 2-dB pad to
the BBM1 board. For 4-, 5-, or 6-sector configurations, the 2-dB pad is replaced by
a 1:2 divider. The combination of a 6:1 combiner and 2-dB pad and a 6:1
combiner and 1:2 divider are roughly equivalent to the loss of the 1:9 divider they
replace. The simulated omni signal is sent to the upper Switchable Radio Shelf or,
through the 1:2 divider, to both the upper and lower Switchable Radio Shelves.
The 6:1 combiner output signal simulates the omnidirectional setup antenna
signal of an omnidirectional setup/directional voice Cell Site, thereby eliminating
the need for an omnidirectional antenna dedicated to the setup function.
AllOmnidirectional
Configuration
The basic all-omnidirectional configuration (see Figure 10-6) consists of one voice
channel transmit antenna, one optional setup transmit antenna to handle
transmission and paging signals over the entire cell,* and two receive antennas.
The receive antennas feed all Cell Site voice channel radios, setup radios, and
analog locate radios.
In an all-omnidirectional configuration, up to seven voice channel transmit
antennas are possible via the multiple-LAC feature. The multiple-LAC feature
allows up to seven LACs and seven transmit antennas to be associated with one
antenna face. The maximum number of transmit antennas at a Series II Cell Site
is 7.
The basic all-omnidirectional configuration described here requires omnidirectional setup. There are three setup
configuration options—omnidirectional setup, directional setup, and simulcast setup.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-9
Antenna Hardware Configurations
PRIMARY—AIF0
GROWTH—AIF1
Ref Freq Gen
Rcvr Cal Gen
Radio Sw PanelRX 0TX RX 1
RX 0TX RX 1
TX RX 1
RX 0
RX 0 TX RX 1
RCF
LAC 4
RCF
RCF
LAC 5
RCF
ANT 0 OMNI
RCF
LAC 0
RCF
RCF
LAC 1
RCF
RCF
LAC 2
RCF
RCF
LAC 3
RCF
ANT 1 ALPHA
ANT 2 BETA
RX 0TX RX 1 ANT 3 GAMMA
ANT 4 DELTA
RX 0 TX RX 1 ANT 5 EPSILON
RCF
LAC 6
RCF
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 6 ZETA
A. SERIES II Cell Site WITH OMNIDIRECTIONAL SETUP
PRIMARY—AIF0
GROWTH—AIF1
Ref Freq Gen
Rcvr Cal Gen
Rad Sw Panel RX 0 TX RX 1
RCF
LAC 0
RCF
RCF
LAC 1
RCF
RX 0TX RX 1
ANT 0 ALPHA
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 1
BETA
RX 0 TX RX 1
RCF
LAC 4
RCF
RCF
LAC 5
RCF
ANT 4
RX 0TX RX 1
ANT 5
EPSILON
ZETA
ANT 2 GAMMA
RCF
LAC 2
RCF
RCF
LAC 3
RCF
RX 0 TX RX 1
ANT 3 GAMMA
B. SERIES II Cell Site WITH DIRECTIONAL OR SIMULCAST SETUP
Figure 10-5. Mapping of Antenna Faces to Antenna Sets for the
Various Setup Options
All-Directional
Configuration
In general, it will be necessary ultimately to sector omni cells to minimize
interference and provide increased system performance quality. Sectoring (see
Figure 10-5) is normally done with 120-degree directional antennas, where three
transmit antennas are used to cover the full 360 degrees. Sectoring may also be
done with 60-degree directional antennas, where six transmit antennas are used
to cover the full 360 degrees.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
Primary—LAF0
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
Growth—LAF1
LAC 3 OUT
AIF0
LAC 2
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
LAC 6 OUT
AIF1
LAC 6
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
LAC 2 OUT
AIF0
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
LAC 5 OUT
AIF1
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
LAC 1 OUT
AIF0
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
LAC 4 OUT
AIF1
RCF0
RCF1
RCF2
LAC 0
LAC 4
LAC 0 OUT
AIF0
Legend:
= LAM
= LAC
Primary—AIF0
Ref Freq Gen
Rcvr Cal Gen
Radio Sw PanelRX TX
0RX
RCF
LAC 0
RCF
Growth—AIF1
Setup TX (Note)
ANT 0 OMNI
TX
VOICE TX
LAC 4
TX
TX
VOICE TX
LAC 1
VOICE TX
LAC 5
TX
TX
VOICE TX
LAC 2
VOICE TX
LAC 6
TX
VOICE TX
LAC 3
Note: Setup TX May Also Carry Voice Channels.
Figure 10-6. Omnidirectional Cell Site Having Seven Transmit Antennas
The basic all-directional configuration consists of:
1.
Three sets of 3-sector (120-degree) directional antennas or six sets of 6sector (60-degree) directional antennas,
2.
One optional omnidirectional setup transmit antenna to handle
transmission and paging signals over the entire cell, and
3.
Two optional omnidirectional setup receive antennas. Each physical
antenna face has one or two directional transmit antennas and two
directional receive antennas.
Thus, when a cell is sectored, there are at least nine 120-degree directional
antennas or 18 60-degree directional antennas, plus the optional three
omnidirectional setup antennas to complete the configuration—for a maximum of
21 antennas at a Series II Cell Site.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-11
Antenna Hardware Configurations
If duplexers are used on each antenna face, the maximum number of antennas is
reduced to 14. A duplexer is a combined receive and transmit filter panel that
connects to a single antenna. Functionally, the receive and transmit circuits are
the same as the separate receive and transmit filter panels, except that the
duplexer provides a combined receive/transmit antenna port. Thus, the duplexer
permits multiplexing of one of the receive paths—usually diversity 0—with the
transmit path of an antenna face, thereby reducing the required number of
antennas from three to two per face.
A 3-sector cell has three physical antenna faces, which are functionally
designated alpha, beta, and gamma. Usually, the antenna face whose center line
is pointing north is called alpha. The antenna face clockwise from alpha is called
beta, and the antenna face clockwise from beta is called gamma.
A 6-sector cell has six physical antenna faces, which are functionally designated
alpha, beta, gamma, delta, epsilon, and zeta. The antenna face clockwise from
gamma is called delta, the antenna face clockwise from delta is called epsilon,
and the antenna face clockwise from epsilon is called zeta.
Figure 10-1 shows how the antenna faces map to antenna sets for the
omnidirectional, directional, and simulcast setup options. Notice that antenna 0
does not necessarily mean antenna omni; antenna 0 may also mean antenna
alpha—at a Cell Site having directional or simulcast setup.
The Cell Site RCC identifies the transmit and receive antennas associated with an
antenna face by the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) switch positions used to
test them. The RSP cable connections to transmit antennas 0 through 6 are fixed,
but the RSP cable connections to receive antennas 0 through 6 for diversity 0 and
diversity 1 are not fixed and depend upon whether antenna 0 means antenna
omni or antenna alpha. The RSP cable connections at a Series II Cell Site when
antenna 0 means antenna omni (applicable to Cell Sites having omnidirectional
setup). The RSP cable connections at a Series II Cell Site when antenna 0 means
antenna alpha (applicable to Cell Sites having).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
Radio Transmission and Reception
The Cell Site receives digital-voice signals via a T1 line, modulates and upconverts the signals to RF, and then transmits the RF output signals over the air
interface to a mobile station. In the mobile-transmit direction, the Cell Site receives
RF input signals from a mobile station via the receive antennas (two inputs for
diversity), then filters, amplifies, and recovers the original mobile data for
transmission over a T1 line to the MSC.
Two-branch spatial diversity on reception is achieved by providing two receive
antennas physically separated by about 3 to 4 meters so that their received
signals are not correlated. When one antenna receives a multipath fade, the other
antenna probably will not.
RF Transmitter
Interfaces
There are two distinct RF transmitter interface configurations: the allomnidirectional antenna configuration and the all-directional (120- or 60-degree)
antenna configuration. The RF output can be transmitted through an omnitransmit antenna or through a transmit antenna on one of the physical antenna
faces of the directional antennas. The low-power RF transmissions from multiple
radios are combined and amplified by a LAC and sent through a transmit filter
panel to the transmit antenna (see Figure 10-7).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-13
Antenna Hardware Configurations
TX BANDPASS
FILTER
TEST COUPLER
Tx"0"
Tx"1"
Tx"2"
Tx"3"
ROM
AF
TO TX
ANTENNAS
Tx"4"
Tx"5"
Tx"6"
P/O AIF
Figure 10-7. Antenna Coupler
RF Receiver
Interfaces
There are two distinct RF receiver interface configurations: the all-omnidirectional
antenna configuration and the all-directional (120- and 60-degree) antenna
configuration. The RF input can be received through a pair of omni-receive
antennas or through a pair of receive antennas on one of the physical antenna
faces of the directional antennas. The RF input signals pass through receive filter
panels to RF power dividers, where the signals are divided and cabled to the
diversity 0 and diversity 1 receiver sections (identical receivers) of the radios.
2 Branch
Intelligent
Antenna, Feature
IDentification
(FID) #3145
What “2 Branch” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
This chapter covers the “2 Branch Intelligent Antennas” feature, which has
Feature IDentification (FID) #3145. The “2 Branch Intelligent Antennas” feature
was developed to deliver better voice quality on the transmission link between the
mobile and the base station. “2 branch” refers to the 2 existing paths, 1 path from
each of the 2 diversity receive antennas, to the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s
(EDRU) or the Dual Radio Module (DRM). While a four branch reverse link system
would have yielded a greater improvement in voice quality, it would have required
extensive redesign of the existing Series II architecture. Therefore, the 2 branch
system, which required no redesign, was implemented.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
How the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is used to support 2
Branch Intelligent Antennas
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas feature is implemented in the Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit’s (EDRU’s) software. However, the 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
Feature does not add a new Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) image. Both of the
existing Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU’s) Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
images (packet pipe & non-packet pipe) incorporate the new software. The
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) is used in the Series II Classic, Series IIe,
Series IIm, Series IImm, and PCS TDMA Minicell products. The 2 Branch
Intelligent Antennas Feature is not intended for and does not work with Lucent’s
analog products. No extra Radio Frequency (RF) hardware is required to
implement this feature and it does not impact the existing base station’s Radio
Frequency (RF) footprint, antennas, size, or power.
What “Intelligent” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
“Intelligent Antennas” refers to an entire system comprised of a radiating structure
with antennas for transmit and receive, which are connected via Radio Frequency
(RF) cables to a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) (within the Enhanced Digital
Radio Unit’s (EDRU) which has the ability to execute intelligent algorithms that
process the Radio Frequency (RF) signals to improve system performance.
The Adaptive
Interference
Rejection
Technique
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature uses the “Adaptive Interference
Rejection,” technique, also known as digital beamforming, for optimally combining
the 2 diversity receive antennas. Adaptive Interference Rejection captures the
Radio Frequency (RF) signals from the antenna elements and converting them
into 2 streams of binary I and Q signals, which together represent the amplitudes
and phases of the signals received by the antenna. The adaptive interference
rejection is carried out by weighting these digital signals, thereby adjusting their
amplitudes and phases, such that when they are added together, it maximizes the
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SINR) for the desired signal. A typical digital adaptive
interference rejection system consists of an array of antenna elements,
independent receivers for the individual antenna elements, and one or more
digital signal processors. This feature is a software enhancement only and
makes use of the existing 2 branch architecture for receive diversity built into the
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU). This feature works for only the reverse
link in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU). All processing is done at
baseband.
Performance with 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature provides better voice quality in an
interference dominated environment on the reverse link (Mobile to Base Station)
only. The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas feature yields a 3 dB performance
enhancement in the reverse link C/I in an interference limited environment when
compared to the existing maximal ratio combining technique used in the
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-15
Antenna Hardware Configurations
differential detection and trellis equalization paths. On average, co-channel
interference is expected to decrease by a nominal 3 dB compared to the classic
diversity scheme in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) in an interference
limited environment. The level of improvement depends on the distribution of cochannel users in neighboring cells. This feature allows each 30 kHz TDMA
channel, through software processing, to reduce/eliminate the effects of cochannel interference within the field of view of the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s
(EDRU). Baseband processing is able to combine the spatially separated
diversities for interference rejection.
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature equals the performance of the existing
maximal ratio combining technique when used in a noise limited environment. The
feature does not increase the existing capacity or range of the base station in a
noise limited environment. A tower top Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), however,
provides range extension on the reverse link in a noise limited environment. Using
this feature together with a tower top Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) would yield
interference rejection and range extension on the reverse link. However, the
purpose of this feature is to improve voice quality in an interference limited
environment, not a noise limited environment. Activation of this feature does not
degrade the existing performance of the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) in
a noise limited environment.
Digital Locate under 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature should not be implemented on the
digital locate radio. Locate radios are used to determine if a call will be placed on
a certain channel. Selection criteria should be based on the best channel in a
noise limited environment. Calls should not be placed on channels with a lot of
interference.
2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Testing
Testing of the 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas on the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s
(EDRU) feature is done in maximal ratio combining mode. Current testing in the
Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) only tests one branch of the dual diversity
receive paths at a time. To eliminate the development of a new testing routine with
minimal gains, the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) should be switched
back to maximal ratio combining mode and tested one branch at a time.
2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Phased Release
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature is a phased release. Phase 1
implements this feature on the digital traffic radio and incorporates the adaptive
interference rejection technique into the differential detection path of the Digital
Signal Processor (DSP).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Antenna Hardware Configurations
2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature Activation
The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature is activated on a per Cell Site Feature
Activation File with Qualifiers (QFAF) basis. The feature is enabled from the
Mobile Switching Center (MSC) by a translation to select adaptive interference
mode or maximal ratio combining mode on a cell by cell basis. All Enhanced
Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRUs) at the cell site have the feature turned on or off on a
cell by cell basis using RC/V.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
10-17
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
10-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11
Cell Site Hardware Functions and
Interconnections
Contents
■
Contents
11-1
■
Introduction
11-5
■
Radio Control Complex (RCC)
11-5
Digital Signal (DS1) Units
11-6
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) Units
11-6
Clock And Tone (CAT) Units
11-7
Radio Frame Set
11-7
RCF Architecture and Bus Structure
11-9
System bus
11-9
Update bus
11-9
TDM buses
11-9
Data Link and Voice
Path Connections11-14
T1/E1 Communications
11-14
T1 Line Interface
11-16
E1 Line Interface
11-16
■
Line Interface Connections at the Cell
11-17
■
Data Link Configurations
11-21
One DS1/DFI Unit and One Data Link
11-21
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-1
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
■
■
One DS1/DFI Unit and Two Data Links
11-21
Two DS1/DFI Units and Two Data Links
11-21
Remote Data Link Reconfiguration
11-21
External Interfaces to the Series II Cell Site
Voice Trunks from the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS)
11-22
Time Division Multiplexed Buses
11-22
TDM Bus Operation
11-22
TDM Bus Addresses
11-24
TDM Bus Communications: the Archangel/Angel Concept
11-26
Angel
11-27
Archangel
11-27
■
Sanity And Control Interface
11-28
■
NPE and SNPE
11-31
■
Synchronization of the Cell Site to the MSC
11-32
■
■
■
TDMCKSEL
11-36
TDMCKFAIL
11-36
TDMCLK
11-36
TDMFR
11-36
TDMSYNC1
11-36
TDMSYNC2
11-36
Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to Cell Site Communications
11-37
DS1, DFI, and CAT Circuit Descriptions
11-38
DS1 (TN171) Circuit Description
11-38
DFI (TN3500) Circuit Description
11-38
DFI (TN1713B) Circuit Operation
11-40
DFI Initialization Message for T1 Operation
D4 or ESF Framing
■
11-42
11-46
Line-length Compensation Setting
11-46
Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB Control
11-46
Select Synchronization Reference
11-47
Specify Idle Code
11-47
DFI Initialization Message for E1 Operation
401-660-100 Issue 11
11-42
ZCS or B8ZS Line Format
11-48
CEPT Framing with or without CRC-4 Error Checking
11-48
CCS or CAS Signaling Mode
11-48
HDB3 or Transparent Line Format
11-50
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-2
11-22
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
■
Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB Control
11-50
Select Synchronization Reference
11-50
Select Idle Code
11-50
DFI Network-Update Talk Message
11-50
DFI Network-Update Listen Message
11-50
DFI Status Indicators
11-51
Red LED
11-51
Yellow LED
11-51
Green LED
11-51
■
CAT (TN170) Circuit Description
11-52
■
Bus Clock Generation and Monitoring for the TDM Bus
11-55
■
Maintenance Tone Generation
11-56
Maintenance Tone Detection and Measurement
■
CAT Status Indicators
11-57
11-58
Red LED
11-58
Green LED
11-58
■
Automatic Recovery Actions
11-59
■
Hardware Error Handling Strategy
11-60
Immediate Action
11-60
All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis
11-60
Single Time-period Analysis
11-60
Fail/Pass Analysis
11-60
Leaky Bucket Analysis
11-61
■
RCC Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions
11-62
■
DS1/DFI Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions
11-63
DS1/DFI and T1 Errors—Detailed Description
11-64
■
■
Loss Of Signal (LOS)
11-64
Blue Alarm
11-64
Red Alarm
11-64
Major Alarm
11-65
Yellow Alarm
11-65
Fan Alarms
11-66
Preamp Fan
11-66
LineariZeR Fan Procedure
11-66
Major Alarm
11-66
Minor Alarm
11-67
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-3
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
LAU Fan Procedure
Major Alarm
11-67
Minor Alarm
11-67
Measuring the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) Fan Voltage
■
■
■
DS1 Errors
11-68
11-68
Misframe Count
11-68
DFI and E1 Errors - Detailed Description
11-69
Loss Of Signal (LOS)
11-69
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
11-69
Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA)
11-69
Loss of Multiframe Alignment (LMA)
11-70
10e-3 Error-ratio Alarm
11-70
Remote Frame Alarm (RFA)
11-70
Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA)
11-71
10e-6 Error-Ratio Alarm
11-71
Slip Count
11-71
CAT Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions
11-72
11-72
Diversity Imbalance Errors and Recovery Actions
11-72
Manual Recovery Actions
11-73
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
11-67
Minor Alarm
Call-Processing Errors and Recovery Actions
11-4
11-67
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Introduction
The Series II Cell Site (See Figure 11-1) includes controllers, radios, wideband
linear amplifiers, antennas, and associated equipment for setting up and
completing cellular calls. It can support AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA simultaneously
through the same wideband linear amplifier and antennas.
Hardware elements common to AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA are the linear amplifier
frames (LAFs), the antenna interface frames (AIFs), and the hardware units
resident in the RCF (See Figure 11-2). The hardware units resident in the radio
channel frames (RCFs) are described in the following paragraphs.
RX 0 TX RX 1
Radio Frame Set
TX
TX
TX
TX
DS-1
Voice
and
Data
Links
RX
Radio
Channel
Frame 0
(RCF0)
Facilities
Interface
Frame
(FIF)
Radio
Channel
Frame 1
(RCF1)
Primary Growth
Figure 11-1.
Radio Control
Complex (RCC)
Linear
Amplifier
Frame 1
(LAF1)
Radio
Channel
Frame 2
(RCF2)
Linear
Amplifier
Frame 0
(LAF0)
Growth
Primary Growth
Antenna
Interface
Frame 0
(AIF0)
Antenna
Interface
Frame 1
(AIF1)
Primary Growth
Series II Cell Site Architecture
The RCC (See Figure 11-2) provides control of the Cell Site equipment and
performs call processing in conjunction with the ECP complex. Specifically, the
RCC performs the following tasks:
■
Manages radio resources and speech trunks
■
Gathers statistical information about the operation of the cell for network
management
■
Maintains the service status of hardware and software entities within the
cell
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-5
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
■
Monitors subordinate hardware devices for detected faults
■
Performs diagnostic tests on the Cell Site equipment
The Radio Control Complex (RCC) controls the entire Radio Frame Set (RFS).
The RCC is fully redundant and uses two identical processors, called RCC 0 and
RCC 1, as shown in Figure 11-2. Normally, one processor is active and one is
standby. Each processor contains a memory, Network Control Interfaces (NCIs) to
control the TDM buses, a Communications Processor Interface (CPI), an alarm
interface, and a system bus which connects all circuit packs. An update bus
interconnects the two processors within the RCC. Series II processors have
improved speed and memory capacity. The TDM buses are always installed "red
stripe up."
The RCC also provides the interface to pass Cell Site alarms to the MSC. These
alarms include hardware alarms/power alarms, fire and intrusion alarms, and
environmental alarms. Alarms are monitored by the alarm interface circuits
located in the RCC shelf of the primary Radio Control Frame (RCF). They include
the following:
■
12 internal frame alarms
■
18 user-assigned alarms
■
12 frame alarms from each growth frame
■
6 circuit alarms from the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF)
■
Status alarms from each Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) in the Linear
amplifier Frame (LAFs)
All the user-assigned and the AIF alarms are connected to the primary RCF by
one connector. The status of the alarms originating in the LACs is scanned
periodically and alarm data is transmitted to the P-RCF by a dedicated connector.
Digital Signal
(DS1) Units
DS1 units perform serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between
the T1 lines and the one or two time-division multiplexed (TDM) buses that
connect the primary RCF to the growth RCFs. The DS1 units provide the T1 (1544
kbit/s) connectivity to the DCS. The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe
up."
Digital Facilities
Interface (DFI)
Units
The DFI unit performs serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion
between the T1 lines and the one or two TDM buses that connect the primary
RCF to the growth RCFs. A DFI may reside in any slot reserved for the DS1.
Unlike the DS1, which can terminate only one T1 line, the DFI can terminate up to
two T1 lines, although only one termination is currently supported. In addition, the
DFI can be configured to terminate E1 (2048 kbit/s) lines.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Clock And Tone
(CAT) Units
The CAT unit generates the clock signals for the one or two TDM buses that
connect the primary RCF to the growth RCFs. The TDM buses are always
installed "red stripe up."
Radio Frame Set
A radio frame set consists of a primary RCF and up to two growth RCFs. A radio
frame set is capable of accommodating up to 14 DS1 or DFI units, four CAT units,
200 AMPS radio channel units (RCUs) or single-board RCUs (SBRCUs) (includes
setup, locate, and voice radios), and one AMPS radio test unit (RTU).
T1
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
12 RCU
12 RCU
Shelf 0
12 RCU
12 RCU
12 RCU
Shelf 1
12 RCU
12 RCU
12 RCU
Shelf 2
Interconnection
Panel Assembly
RCC0
TDM0
TDM1
RCC1
Fans
12 RCU
12 RCU
Shelf 3
12 RCU
12 RCU
12 RCU
Shelf 4
12 RCU
12 RCU
12 RCU
Shelf 5
Primary—RCF0
Growth—RCF1
8 RCU
1 RTU
TDM1
Growth—RCF2
RCC1
RCC0
AFI
Mem
Update
Bus
CPU
System
Bus 0
CPI
T1
NCI0
(≤7 DS1s)
TDM0
DS1
(≤7 DS1s)
TDM1
DS1
NCI1
(2 CATs)
CAT
(≤104 RCUs)
RTU
RCU
(2 CATs)
Note: Cat units are redundant for both TDM0 and TDM1.
CAT
(≤96 RCUs)
RCU
Figure 11-2. Radio Frame Set Architecture and Bus Structure
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-7
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
A radio frame set can also accommodate TDMA digital radio units (DRUs,
EDRUs) and a TDMA radio test unit (TRTU). A radio frame set can hold up to 96
DRUs. The maximum number of EDRUs that can be installed in a radio frame set
has yet to be determined.
Any combination of RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs can reside in the primary
RCF or in a growth RCF with the following constraint: no more than five EDRUs
are allowed in the same radio shelf due to DC power limitations. All four radio
types can sit side-by-side in the same radio shelf. The TRTU, when installed, sits
right next to the RTU in the radio test shelf. The DRU occupies two adjoining RCU
slots, the EDRU occupies one RCU slot, and the TRTU occupies two adjoining
RTU slots.
CDMA radios are installed in their own growth RCF, which is designed to house 12
CDMA radios—two (redundant) radios per shelf. (One CDMA radio is active and
one is standby). CDMA radios cannot be installed in the primary RCF, nor can
they be intermixed with RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, or EDRUs in the same growth
RCF. Since there can be up to two growth RCFs in a radio frame set, the Series II
Cell Site can accommodate up to 24 CDMA radios.
A radio frame set consists of at most three RCF frames: a primary RCF and one
or two growth RCFs. One or both of the growth RCFs may be CDMA growth
frames.
The plug-in units, or circuit boards, are physically located by shelf and slot
numbers. Slot numbers are indicated at various points along the horizontal run.
A Radio Frame Set (RFS) consists of at least a primary Radio Channel Frame
(RCF 0) and a maximum of two "growth" RCFs (RCF 1 and RCF 2). All RCFs
contain 6 radio shelves, shelves 0 through 5. The entire RFS is controlled by the
Radio Control Complex (RCC), which is located in the uppermost shelf (Shelf 0) of
the P-RCF.
In the P-RCF, shelves 1, 2, 4, and 5 can each support 12 Radio Channel Units
(RCUs). Shelf 3 of the P-RCF contains the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU),
required to test the radio units, and therefore can only house up to 8 RCUs.
Altogether, RCF 0 can house 56 RCUs or Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs)
(which, like the RCU use only 1 radio slot apiece) (12 x 4 + 8); or RCF 0 can
house 28 Digital Radio Units (DRUs), which use 2 radio slots apiece.
Each of the Growth RCFs is capable of accommodating up to a total of 12 RCUs
or EDRUs on each of its 6 radio shelves, or 72 RCUs or EDRUs apiece (12 x 6); or
a Growth RCF can house 36 DRUs.
TDM bus 0 connects all the radio shelves in RCF 0 and the 4 upper shelves, 0 thru
4, in RCF 1. That makes the number of radio slots covered by TDM bus 0 equal to
104. That many slots could house 104 RCUs or EDRUs or 52 DRUs.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
TDM bus 1 Connects the 2 lowest radio shelves in RCF 1 and all the radio shelves
in RCF 2. That makes the number of radio slots covered by TDM bus 1 equal to
96. That many slots could house 96 RCUs or EDRUs or 48 DRUs.
The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
The number of radios and/or radio channels that TDM buses 0 and 1 support may
or may not be equal to the number of radio units that physically fit into those
shelves that are covered by either of the buses.
RCF Architecture
and Bus Structure
The RCC (See Figure 11-2), which resides on the uppermost shelf (shelf 0) of the
primary RCF, consists of two identical controllers. One controller is active (on-line)
and one is standby (off-line).
System bus
Each RCC controller makes use of a dedicated system bus over which all of the
units that make up the controller communicate. The two system buses (0 and 1)
are embedded in the RCC backplane.
Update bus
An update bus interconnects the two RCC controllers. It is over this bus that the
standby controller obtains information from the active controller so that it is
constantly informed of the status of the operating parameters. This mode of
operation allows an immediate switch from the active-controller side to the matecontroller side with a minimum of lost control information in the event of a
controller failure. The update bus is embedded in the RCC backplane.
TDM buses
There are two TDM buses in the primary and growth RCFs (See Figure 11-3):
TDM bus 0 (TDM0) and TDM bus 1 (TDM1). The TDM buses provide the transfer
paths for both digital-voice and signaling data (call processing or operation and
maintenance messages) within the RCFs. The TDM buses communicate with the
ECP over BX.25 data links (signaling channels).
The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
The TDM buses interconnect the RCC with the other units in the primary and
growth RCFs. The interconnections are accomplished via AYD4 paddleboards
(circuit boards) that mount onto the wiring side of certain backplane pinfields.
Each of these paddleboards has a connector that provides termination to flat
ribbon cable, thus providing the means to complete the necessary
interconnections. In addition, all TDM buses are terminated via AYD3 termination
paddleboards that mount onto the wiring side of certain backplane pinfields.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-9
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
NOTE:
All TDM bus inter-shelf and inter-frame bus cables should be installed with
the pin 1 edge upward. The pin 1 edge is denoted by a red colored stripe.
An upside-down TDM bus cable can reduce the effective signal ground
between shelves and frames and distort the TDMSYNC1 signal, which
provides a reference signal used to lock the T1/E1 span to the TDM bus.
FRONT VIEW OF PRIMARY RCF—RCF0
SLOT NUM
TDM0
RCC
SHELF 0
RCC 1
RCU
SHELF 2
0 1
22
W302
RTU
SHELF 3
TDM0
RCU
SHELF 4
22
W304
RCU
SHELF 5
KEY:
12
0 1
12
G G G N G C N M C
R R R C R P C E P
WWW I W I I M U
T T T 1 T
H H H
7D6D5D 4D3D2D1D0D
M N C G N G G G A D
E C P R C R R R F S
M I I W I WWW I 1
T 1 T T T
H H H
7F
4D5D6D7D0D 1D2D3D
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
C P
A C
T U
0B 0C
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
C P
A C
T U
1B 1C
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
0 1
0E
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
12
10
11 12 13 1415
0F
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
1F 2F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
2B 2C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
3B 3C
12
= AYD4
= AYD3
= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTION
August 2000
TDM0
22
W301
12
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
TDM0
22
BTO/ FROM SHEET 2
Figure 11-3. Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 1 of 3)
11-10
TDM1
W300
SLOT ADDR
TDM0
11 1213141516171819 20 21 22
RCC 0
22
RCU
SHELF 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
W303
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
FRONT VIEW OF FIRST GROWTH RCF—RCF1
RCU
SHELF 0
SLOT NUM 0 1
22
22 A
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
SLOT ADDR 40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
4B 4C
W311
TDM0
RCU
SHELF 1
22
W306
RCU
SHELF 2
RCU
SHELF 3
TDM1
RCU
SHELF 4
22
W309
12
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
5B 5C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B 6C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B 7C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
C P B B
A C B B
T U N N
5 1 1
0B 0C
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
12
12
12
12
0 1
RCU
SHELF 5
KEY:
12
= AYD4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
= AYD3
= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTION A
TDM1
22
W305
22
W310
TDM0
22
W307
TDM1
C P B B
A C B B
T U N N
5 1 1
1B 1C
TO/ FROM SHEET 1/ 3
Figure 11-4. Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 2 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-11
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
FRONT VIEW OF SECOND GROWTH RCF—RCF2
SLOT NUM 0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
12
SLOT ADDR 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
2B 2C
RCU
SHELF 0
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
TDM1
RCU
SHELF 1
22
W306
RCU
SHELF 2
TDM1
RCU
SHELF 3
W308
RCU
SHELF 4
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
2B 3C
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
4B 4C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
12
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B 5C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
12
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
D P B B
S C B B
1 U N N
5 1 1
6B 6C
0 1
10
11
12
13 14 15 1617
12
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B 7C
12
22
W305
30
12
0 1
22
TDM1
TDM1
22
W307
TDM1
22
W309
22
W312
RCU
SHELF 5
KEY:
= AYD4
= AYD3
= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTION
C TO/ FROM SHEET 2
Figure 11-5. Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 3 of 3)
If the radio frame set consists of only the primary RCF, AYD3 termination
paddleboards (instead of AYD4 paddleboards) are installed on the wiring side of
RCF0 shelf 0, slots 15 and 21.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
If the radio frame set consists of only the primary RCF and a growth RCF and
assuming that shelf 4 and/or shelf 5 of RCF1 is populated with radio equipment,
an AYD3 termination paddleboard is installed on the wiring side of RCF1 shelf 5,
slot 14. In addition, to generate clock signals for TDM1, redundant CAT units are
installed in RCF1 shelf 4, slot 14, and RCF1 shelf 5, slot 14.
Each controller contains the following set of plug-in units:
■
One CPU - The core processor (CPU) unit is a 32-bit Motorola MC68020
processing element.
■
One MEM - The 8-megabyte memory (MEM) unit provides the volatile main
memory resource for the CPU.
Applications in Release 9.0 and later require 8-megabytes of memory (as
opposed to 4-megabytes of memory). The 8-megabytes of memory must
be realized by installing one 8-megabyte TN1710 memory unit in RCC0
and one in RCC1. (A memory board has no pin connections to the TDM
bus.)
■
One AFI - The alarms and FITS* interface (AFI) unit monitors alarm
sensors and reports adverse conditions to the CPU.
■
One or Two CPIs - The communications processor interface (CPI) unit
provides BX.25 communication between the CPU and the ECP. One CPI is
required for TDM0, and one CPI is optional for TDM1.
■
One or Two NCIs - The network control interface (NCI) unit provides the
communication interface between the CPU on the system bus and the
TDM-bus client units on the TDM buses. One NCI is required for each TDM
bus.
The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
FITS, for Factory Installation and Test System, is a Lucent Technologies test set that can connect to a special
connector accessible through the faceplate of the AFI. At initial frame installation, FITS is used to download Cell
Site translations and initiate diagnostic tests.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-13
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Data Link and Voice
Path Connections
All data link and voice path connections (See Figure 11-6) between the MSC and
its associated Cell Sites are based on the connection topology specified in the
translations (system-configuration parameters). The Cell Site radios are
connected to their appropriate DS1s or DFIs and T1 trunks (64-kbit/s channels or
DS0s) in accordance with the translations.
Cell Site translations can be set or changed from the ECP or OMP; initially, they
are maintained in the ECP’s application data bases and then downloaded to the
Cell Site RCC. Refer to the Data Base Update Manual (401-610-036) for a
complete listing of Cell Site translations.
The figure shows a data link connection path between the MSC and a Cell Site
RCC:
CDN ‹ CSN ‹ DFI* ‹ TSIU ‹ DFI ‹ FIF ‹ DS1 ‹ CPI ‹ CPU
A Cell Site data link is a static (dedicated) connection path from end to end. All
hardware, T1 trunks, and TDM bus timeslots in the path are assigned statically
(“nailed up”) in accordance with the translations.
The figure also shows a digital-voice connection path between the PSTN and a
Cell Site radio:
PSTN ‹ DFI ‹ TSIU ‹ DFI ‹ FIF ‹ DS1 ‹ RCU
A digital-voice connection path is static except for the connection between the
PSTN and the Cell Site T1 trunk (that is, the connection through the DCS). That
connection is set up and torn down dynamically by the call processing and data
base node (CDN); it is NOT specified in the translations. The CDN receives a call
setup message from the PSTN or Cell Site via a DCS or Cell Site data link. The
CDN decides how to complete the call and then sends the appropriate messages
to the DCS and the targeted Cell Site to set up the call.
T1/E1
Communications
†
The digital-voice and signaling communications between the MSC and the RCC at
the Cell Site are based on a T1/DS1 or E1/CEPT† line interface. The T1 line
interface is the lowest level in the hierarchy of the North American T-carrier digital
transmission facility.
The DFI at the switch is physically different but functionally equivalent to the DFI at the Cell Site.
CEPT stands for Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications Administrations. CEPT, CEPT-1, and
E1 are equivalent terms.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
MSC
SERIES II Cell Site
ECP Complex
ECP
RCF0
RCF1, 2
CNI/ IMS
CPU
CDN CSN
System Bus
RPCN
CDN CSN
NCI0
CPI
NCI1
TDM1
Cell Site
DATA LINKS
(BX.25)
OMP
TDM0
DFI
DRU
RCU
5ESS®-2000 Switch DCS
DFI
TSIU
DFI
TSIU
DFI
FIF
Dynamically
Assigned Path
Data Link
Voice
T1 Lines
To/From
PSTN
DEFINITIONS:
CDN
Call processing and Data base Node (Cabinet)
IMS
Interprocess Message Switch
CNI
Common Network Interface
MSC
Mobile Switching Center
CPI
Communications Processor Interface (Board)
NCI
Network Control Interface (Board)
CPU
Core Processor (Board)
OMP
Operations and Management Platform
CSN
Cell Site Node (Cabinet)
DCS
Digital Cellular Switch
DFI
Digital Facilities Interface (Board)
DRU
Digital Radio Unit (Board—TDMA Radio)
ECP
Executive Cellular Processor
FIF
Facilities Interface Frame (Cabinet)
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
RCF
Radio Channel Frame
RCU
Radio Channel Unit (Board—AMPS Radio)
RPCN
Ring Peripheral Controller Node (Cabinet)
SM
Switching Module (Cabinet)
Figure 11-6. Data Link and Voice Paths—Example
The DS1 and DFI hardware units are the carrier line interface circuits at the Cell
Site. The DS1 can terminate one T1 line. The DFI can terminate two T1 lines or
two E1 lines, although only one termination is currently supported. That is, of the
two line interface ports on the DFI—port 0 and port 1, only port 0 is currently used
to terminate a carrier line.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-15
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
A Cell Site may connect to T1 lines or E1 lines but not a mixture of both. The DS1
and DFI can support the all-T1 Cell Site configuration. Only DFIs can support the
all-E1 Cell Site configuration.
T1 Line Interface
As shown in Figure 11-7, a T1/DS1 frame consists of twenty-four 8-bit timeslots,
or channels, plus one F bit (for detection of frame boundaries and the transport of
additional information), resulting in a 193-bit frame. The 193-bit frame, which is
repeated every 125 ms—8000 times per second, yields a line rate of 1544 kbit/s.
Each channel, referred to as a DS0, operates at a 64-kbit/s rate.
A T1 line is a balanced, full-duplex digital transmission line: one twisted pair to
transmit data and one twisted pair to receive data. It must be terminated at both
ends in its characteristic impedance, that is, 120 ohms. A T1 line can
accommodate 24 digital-voice communication channels or a combination of
digital-voice and signaling channels.
E1 Line Interface
As shown in Figure 11-8, an E1/CEPT frame consists of thirty-two 8-bit timeslots,
or channels, of which one channel, timeslot 0 (TS0), is reserved for framing and
alarm information. The 256-bit frame, which is repeated every 125 ms—8000
times per second, yields a line rate of 2048 kbit/s. Each channel operates at a 64kbit/s rate.
An E1 line is a balanced or unbalanced, full-duplex digital transmission line: one
twisted pair or coaxial cable to transmit data and one twisted pair or coaxial cable
to receive data. It must be terminated at both ends in its characteristic impedance,
that is, 120 ohms for twisted pair and 75 ohms for coaxial cable. An E1 line can
accommodate 31 digital-voice communication channels or a combination of
digital-voice and signaling channels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Line Interface Connections at the Cell
The T1 line interface at the cell is 120-ohm twisted pair. The E1 line interface at
the cell is optionally configurable for 120-ohm twisted pair or 75-ohm coaxial
cable, but not both.
The channel service units (CSUs) in the FIF provide the electrical interface
between the T1 lines and the DS1s/DFIs in the RCF. Two 14-pin, D-type female
connectors provide the 120-ohm twisted-pair connector interface at the primary or
growth RCF.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-17
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
1 sec
(1,544,000 BITS)
FRAMES
FR0
FR1
FR2
FR3
TIMESLOTS
(CHANNELS)
CH1
CH2
CH3
FR3
FR4
FR5
CH22
CH23
FR7998
FR7999
FR7998
FR7999
CH24
125 µs
(193 BITS—192 DATA BITS + 1 F BIT)
0.6477 µs
BITS
5.18 µs
(8 BITS)
A. T1/DS1 TRANSMISSION FORMAT
1 sec
(2,048,000 TIMESLOTS)
FRAMES
FR0
FR1
FR2
FR3
FR4
FR5
0.5 µs
TIMESLOTS
251 252 253 254 255
125 µs
(256 TIMESLOTS)
DEDICATED TO
SUPERVISION AND
CONTROL
(SEE NOTE)
DEDICATED TO
DIGITAL-VOICE/SIGNALING
TRANSPORT
NOTE: FOR TDM0 AND TDM1, 251 TIMESLOTS ON HIGHWAY A AND HIGHWAY B (502 TIMESLOTS TOTAL)
ARE AVAILABLE FOR DIGITAL-VOICE AND SIGNALING TRANSPORT.
B. TDM BUS TRANSMISSION FORMAT
Figure 11-7. T1/DS1 Transmission Format and RCF TDM Bus Transmission
Format
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
1 sec
(2,048,000 BITS)
FRAMES
FR0
FR1
FR2
FR3
TIMESLOTS
(CHANNELS)
TS0
TS1
TS2
FR3
FR4
FR5
TS29
TS30
FR7998
FR7999
FR7998
FR7999
TS31
125 µs
(256 BITS)
0.5 µs
BITS
3.91 µs
(8 BITS)
A. E1/CEPT TRANSMISSION FORMAT
1 sec
(2,048,000 TIMESLOTS)
FRAMES
FR0
FR1
FR2
FR3
FR4
FR5
0.5 µs
TIMESLOTS
251 252 253 254 255
125 µs
(256 TIMESLOTS)
DEDICATED TO
SUPERVISION AND
CONTROL
(SEE NOTE)
DEDICATED TO
DIGITAL-VOICE/SIGNALING
TRANSPORT
NOTE: FOR TDM0 AND TDM1, 251 TIMESLOTS ON HIGHWAY A AND HIGHWAY B (502 TIMESLOTS TOTAL)
ARE AVAILABLE FOR DIGITAL-VOICE AND SIGNALING TRANSPORT.
B. TDM BUS TRANSMISSION FORMAT
Figure 11-8. E1/CEPT Transmission Format and RCF TDM Bus Transmission
Format
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-19
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Customer-provided network termination units (NTUs)* provide the electrical
interface between the E1 lines and the DFIs in the RCF. The same two 14-pin, Dtype receptacle described above provide the 120-ohm twisted-pair connector
interface at the primary or growth RCF. An additional piece of equipment, referred
to as a balun (for balanced/unbalanced), is needed to accommodate the 75-ohm
coaxial-cable interface. A balun is an impedance-matching device used to connect
balanced twisted-pair cabling with unbalanced coaxial cable. Coaxial cables from
the NTU connect to BNC connectors on the balun, and twisted-pair cabling from
the balun connects to the two 14-pin connectors on the primary or growth RCF.
To realize the NTU function, Lucent Technologies is currently testing an E-SMART® plug-in card developed by
Kentrox Industries. The E-SMART card would replace the T-SMART® card in the T-SMART CSU. (The T-SMART
CSU is one of two types of CSUs that may be installed in the FIF.) More information on this feature will be supplied
when it becomes available.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Data Link Configurations
One BX.25 data link, or signaling channel, is required between the RCC and the
ECP; two data links are needed to achieve increased reliability. The latter is best
accommodated via two carrier lines connected to two separate DS1s/DFIs, with
one BX.25 data link in each line. This arrangement ensures that no single point
failure will reduce service capability by more than 50 percent.
Data link configurations are established using the ECP DNLD: CELL a,DLOPTS
command. This command is used to establish any one of the following data link
configurations:
One DS1/DFI Unit
and One Data Link
The DS1/DFI is in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (logical unit DS1 0 as seen
at the ECP); the data link is carried in channel 24 of the attached carrier line.
One DS1/DFI Unit
and Two Data
Links
The DS1/DFI is in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (DS1 0 as seen at the
ECP); the primary data link (DL 0) is carried in channel 24 of the attached carrier
line, and the secondary data link (DL 1) is carried in channel 13 of the attached
carrier line.
Two DS1/DFI
Units and Two
Data Links
One DS1/DFI is in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (DS1 0 as seen at the
ECP), and one is in shelf 4, slot 14, of the primary RCF (DS1 1 as seen at the
ECP); DL 0 is carried in channel 24 of the carrier line attached to DS1 0; DL 1 is
carried in channel 24 of the carrier line attached to DS1 1.
In the current RC/V implementation, the physical unit mappings for logical units
DS1 0 and DS1 1 are fixed (as stated above) and cannot be changed by the user.
For a Cell Site configured with two data links, both data links are active. DL 0
carries call-processing messages, and DL 1 carries maintenance and locate
request messages. If one data link fails or is placed out-of-service, the other data
link must carry all of the message traffic between the RCC and the ECP; callprocessing messages have priority over maintenance and locate request
messages.
Remote Data Link
Reconfiguration
Release 4.3 supports two ways to update data link parameters: by Factory
Installation Test System (FITS) and by cell data links (that is, from the Mobile
Switching Center (MSC)). While changing data link parameters from the MSC, the
cell remains in service. However, at least one Core Processor Unit (CPU) must
have the correct current data link options to keep the Cell Site in service. The new
data link parameters are downloaded to the inactive (mate) CPU. A Radio Control
Complex (RCC), that is, Cell Site Controller side switch is then made, and the
parameters are copied from the new active, updated CPU to the new mate CPU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-21
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
External Interfaces to the Series II Cell
Site
Voice Trunks from
the Digital
Cellular Switch
(DCS)
Cell data links from the Interprocess Message Switch (IMS) ring are connected to
the TDM buses by integrated Digital Cross-Connect (DSX-1) interfaces. Data links
from the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) are connected to TDM bus 0.
The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
The TDM buses provide the paths for control and data transfer within the RFS.
Within the RFS there may be up to 200 RCUs (195 can be used for voice), 1 RTU,
14 Digital Service 1 (DS1) or Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) boards, 4 Clock And
Tone (CAT) boards, and the number of RF switch modules, transmit combiners,
receive dividers, and power supply boards required to handle the RFS
configuration used.
Time Division
Multiplexed Buses
All external interfaces (that is, T1 or E1 lines from the MSC) are connected to the
RCF TDM buses via the DS1/DFI interfaces. (Data links from the MSC are
connected to TDM0 via DS1 0 and DS1 1). The TDM buses provide the paths for
control and data transfer within the primary RCF and any attached growth RCF(s).
The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
TDM Bus Operation
The TDM buses, TDM0 and TDM1, are independently synchronized to individual
carrier lines connected to the cell; those lines are specified by Cell Site system
software. The DS1/DFI serving a synchronization line continually extracts a framesync signal (8 kHz) from the carrier line and passes it to the active CAT unit. Using
the 8-kHz signal as the sync reference, the active CAT generates two system
clocks for the TDM bus: a 2048-kHz timeslot clock and an 8-kHz framing clock.
Each TDM bus operates at 2048 kHz with a frame rate of 8 kHz.
A TDM bus consists of two 8-bit highways (highway A and highway B); each
highway provides 256 timeslots. (Each highway requires eight wires and carries
eight bits per timeslot.) For both TDM0 and TDM1, the first five timeslots on
highway A and highway B—timeslots 0 through 4—are dedicated for control, and
the rest are used to carry user information. At any given time, only one of the
highways (highway A or highway B) is actively used to carry control information.
Timeslots 0 through 4 are referred to as the TDM bus control channel.
The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
TDM BUS INTErfACE
SIDE ACTIVE
TDM0/ 1 BUS
BUS
TRANSCEIVERS
TDMCKSEL
TDMCKFAIL
CLK SRC SEL
TDM CLOCKS
CLOCK
MONITOR/
CONTROL
DATA (8)
DATA (16)
(NOTE 2)
DUAL-PORT
RAM
(MEMORY)
DATA (8)
ADDR (10)
DATA ADDR
TX/ RX
Control
TO/ FROM
SYSTEM
BUS
CIRCUITS
ON NCI
SAKI
(Bus Sanity
And
Control
(Hardwired
Slot ADDR) Interface)
RED LED
(FAILURE)
ANA
FROM
(+5 VDC
(ARCHANGEL
MODE)
ADDR
LATCH
ENABLE
ADDR/ DATA (8)
RESET
ARCHANGEL
(8-Bit MicroProcessor)
EA
ADDRESS
LATCH
EPROM
(BOOT)
ADDR (8)
ADDR (15)
ADDR (11)
B(NOTE 1)
NOTES:
1.
2.
TDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUS.
THE 8-BIT MICROPROCESSOR (ARCHANGEL) CONTROLS WHICH TDM BUS (A OR B) CONNECTS TO THE SAKI.
Figure 11-9. TDM-Bus Interface Circuitry for the NCI—TDM Bus Archangel
The updating of firmware (software stored in updatable non-volatile memory—
NVM) to TDM-bus client units is accomplished through the TDM bus, specifically,
through the TDM bus control channel. TDM-bus client units having updatable nonvolatile memory are the RCU, SBRCU, RTU, DRU, EDRU, TRTU, CCC, BIU, SCT,
and CRTUi.
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-23
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
The CPU and CPI also have updatable non-volatile memory; the updating of CPU
or CPI firmware is accomplished through the system bus.
For the AMPS and TDMA access technologies, one full-duplex timeslot on the
TDM bus, that is, one timeslot for transmission and one for reception, can carry
one digital-voice channel. (The TDM bus interface for the RCU or SBRCU is a
single full-duplex timeslot, and the TDM bus interface for the DRU or EDRU is
three full-duplex timeslots.) For the CDMA access technology, four full-duplex
timeslots on the TDM bus, called a packet pipe, can carry up to 14 digital-voice
channels* for 8-kbit/s voice encoders (vocoders). (The TDM bus interface for the
CCC is a single packet pipe.) The timeslots are assigned statically (“nailed up”) to
the various TDM-bus client units in accordance with the Cell Site’s translations
data base.
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
TDM Bus Addresses
Supervisory and control information is passed from the CPU to the various TDMbus clients via the TDM0 and TDM1 control channels. To control individual units
selectively on a TDM bus, a unique 7-bit address is assigned to each slot position
served by that bus. The figure identifies the 7-bit addresses—in hexadecimal
format—for the various slot positions within the primary and growth RCFs.
The pin designations for the slot address are BA0 (LSB) through BA6 (MSB). The
logic values for BA0 through BA6 are unique for each of the slot positions
connected to the TDM bus. The 7-bit address for a slot position is established by
grounding an address pin for a logic 0, and leaving an address pin unconnected
for a logic 1. The 7-pin address for a slot position is realized only when a unit is
installed in that slot position: each of the seven address pins is connected to a
pull-up resistor on the installed unit.
The backplanes for the RCU shelves are identical; therefore, each RCU shelf has
an associated 4-pole switch used to select unique logic values for the upper slotaddress bits BA4, BA5, and BA6 (See Table 11-1, and Table 11-2). The switches
are soldered to 8-pin paddleboard connectors that mount onto the wiring side
(rear side) of the backplane pinfield at slot 14 (P14).
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
In CDMA (and TDMA) terminology, a digital-voice channel is usually referred to as a traffic channel.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Table 11-1.
Switch Settings for RCU Shelves in First Growth RCF—RCF1
Shelf Number
Switch Position Settings*
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
OFF
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
OFF
Don’t Care
ON
ON
ON
Don’t Care
ON
ON
OFF
* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1
Table 11-2.
Switch Settings for RCU Shelves in Second Growth RCF—RCF2
Shelf Number
Switch Position Settings*
Don’t Care
ON
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
ON
OFF
OFF
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
ON
OFF
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
ON
Don’t Care
OFF
OFF
OFF
* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-25
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
TDM Bus Communications: the
Archangel/Angel Concept
This section lists and briefly describes the various hardware devices that form the
TDM bus interface and perform the TDM bus communications. The NCI contains
the primary TDM bus processor, or archangel (See Figure 11-9), through which all
other TDM bus processors, or angels (See Figure 11-10), communicate. Angel
processors reside on the TDM bus client units.
TDM BUS INTErfACE
TDM0 BUS
BUS
TRANSCEIVERS
TDM CLOCKS
NPE
DATA (8)
(PARALLEL
TO SERIAL
CONVERTER,
HAS FOUR
SERIAL I/O
CHANNELS)
DATA (8)
TX/ RX
CONTROL
PORT 0
PORT 1
512-kHz CLK
TO/ FROM
OTHER
CIRCUITS
ON CPI
SAKI
(BUS SANITY
AND CONTROL
(HARDWIRED
INTErfACE)
SLOT ADDR)
RED LED
(FAILURE)
ANA
GRD
(ANGEL
MODE)
ADDR LATCH ENABLE
ADDR/ DATA (8)
RESET
DATA (16)
ADDRESS
LATCH
ANGEL
(8-BIT MICROPROCESSOR)
DUAL-PORT
RAM
ADDR (10)
ADDR (8)
EA
+5 VDC
SRAM
ADDR (11)
ADDR (11)
B (NOTE)
NOTE: TDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUS.
Figure 11-10. TDM-Bus Interface Circuitry for the CPI—TDM Bus Angel
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Angel
An angel (See Figure 11-10) is an 8-bit microprocessor that serves as the TDMbus interface controller for a TDM bus client unit. On some units, it also serves as
the main processor for the unit.
Archangel
An archangel (See Figure 11-9) is an 8-bit microprocessor on NCI0 and NCI1 that
passes messages back and forth between the CPU and the TDM bus client units
(angels). NCI 0 interfaces with TDM0, and NCI1 interfaces with TDM1. The NCI is
the distribution point for all downlink messages (messages from the CPU to the
TDM bus client units) as well as the focal point for all uplink messages (messages
from the TDM bus client units to the CPU). In addition to the transfer of messages,
the archangel microprocessor monitors client-unit (angel) sanity and runs periodic
audits on the client units under control of the CPU.
A communication sequence begins when the CPU requests an activity scan of all
client units. In response to an activity scan, the client units that require uplink
message transmission transmit their slot addresses to the NCI. Next, the
archangel microprocessor grants permission to each client unit to enable uplink
message transmission. When the complete message is received, the archangel
microprocessor loads the message to the dual-port RAM for uplink transmission
to the CPU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-27
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Sanity And Control Interface
The sanity and control interface (SAKI) (See Figure 11-11), a Lucent Technologies
custom device, provides a synchronous communications link between the
archangel microprocessor and the angel microprocessors via the TDM bus. The
SAKI transfers information to and from the TDM bus control channel—timeslots 0
through 4 of the TDM frame.
Each SAKI provides board-address recognition, message buffering, and bus
synchronization functions for the archangel/angel microprocessor that it supports.
The SAKI can be configured for one of two modes of operation: archangel mode
or angel mode. A logic 1 on the SAKI archangel/angel (ANA) input pin
corresponds to archangel mode; a logic 0 on ANA corresponds to angel mode.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
In archangel mode, the SAKI (on the NCI) transmits a slot address followed by
whatever message is to be sent to the client unit that has that slot address. It often
takes several TDM frames to transmit the complete message to the targeted unit.
In the receive direction, the SAKI reads and saves all five control channel
timeslots of every TDM frame. Messages are passed to the archangel just as they
are when the SAKI is in angel mode.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-28
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
P/O TDM BUS INTErfACE
TDM0/1 BUS
SAKI
(Bus Sanity (HARDWIRED
And Control SLOT ADDR)
Interface)
BUS
Transceivers
TDMSYNC1
TDMSYNC2
ANA
ADDR/
DATA
TDM CLOCKS 2
DATA (8)
DATA (8)
DATA (8)
DATA (8)
RESET
SNPE 0
(Scotch
Network
Processing
Element 0)
ADDR DATA
ADDR DATA
SNPE 1
B (NOTE)
NOTE: TDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUS
G TO/ FROM SHEET 2
Figure 11-11. SAKI and SNPE Interface
In angel mode, the SAKI (on the TDM-bus client units) monitors the TDM bus
control channel and extracts and holds any information addressed to its angel
microprocessor until the angel microprocessor removes it. The SAKI also
transmits information onto the TDM bus control channel on command from its
angel microprocessor
Sanity checks between the archangel and angel microprocessor are routinely
performed through the SAKI-angel interface. The SAKI monitors the TDM bus for
sanity scans on the TDM bus control channel (directed from the archangel), and
reports any scan request to its angel microprocessor. Sanity control is handled by
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-29
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
a hardware timer that the angel must reset periodically. If the angel does not reset
the timer within the allotted time, the SAKI resets (disables) the angel
microprocessor, turns on the on-board red LED (indicating an error on the unit),
and reports the loss to the archangel microprocessor.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-30
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
NPE and SNPE
The network processing element (NPE) and SCOTCH network processing
element (SNPE), both Lucent Technologies custom devices, perform timeslot
exchange between the parallel TDM bus and serial data buses called
concentration highways, that is, perform parallel-to-serial and serial-to-parallel
conversion of digital-voice data.* They communicate with the TDM bus (highway
A, highway B, or both) during timeslots 5 to 255 of the 256-slot TDM frame.
Each channel of an NPE or SNPE can be programmed by the angel
microprocessor to access two different TDM timeslots: one to carry the channel’s
received samples (uplink information) and the other to carry the channel’s
transmitted samples (downlink information). When the CPU places a channel in
loop-around mode, the channel’s receive timeslot and transmit timeslot are looped
together.
The CPI TDM-bus interface circuitry uses the NPE device. Other units, such as the DFI and CCC, use SNPE
devices because they provide eight times the capacity of NPE devices. An SNPE has 32 serial I/O channels, and
an NPE has four serial I/O channels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-31
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Synchronization of the Cell Site to the
MSC
The DS1/DFI provides an external clock source used to synchronize all digitalvoice and signaling transfers between the carrier lines and the internal TDM
buses. The TDM buses, TDM0 and TDM1, are independently synchronized to the
MSC via separate DS1/DFI units (See Figure 11-12, and Figure 11-13).
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Only one of two DS1s/DFIs may provide the external clock source for TDM0.
Those units are the DS1/DFI in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (DS1 0 as
seen at the ECP) and the DS1/DFI in shelf 4, slot 14, of the primary RCF (DS1 1
as seen at the ECP).
Similarly, only one of two DS1s/DFIs may provide the external clock source for
TDM1. Those units are the first two equipped DS1s/DFIs found by Cell Site
system software residing on TDM1. There are occasions when only one DS1/DFI
is designated as an external clock source for a TDM bus.
Only one DS1 or DFI can be the synchronization reference for a TDM bus at any
given time. That unit will have a lighted green LED.
Only synchronization of TDM0 will be considered in the following discussion. The
two DS1s/DFIs that may provide the external clock source for TDM0 will be
referenced by their logical unit numbers, DS1 0 and DS1 1. All concepts applying
to TDM0 synchronization will also apply to TDM1 synchronization.
For TDM0, a valid synchronization-reference configuration is (1) a carrier line
connected to DS1 0, (2) a carrier line connected to DS1 1, or (3) for reliability, both
a carrier line connected to DS1 0 and a carrier line connected to DS1 1. In the
latter configuration, DS1 0 is the primary synchronization reference, or sync_1,
and DS1 1 is the secondary synchronization reference, or sync_2.
In the figure, logical units DS1 0 and DS1 1 are realized by the DFI; all hardware
units in the figure reside in the primary RCF. For simplicity, no TDM0 bus
connection is shown for DS1 1.
Initially, when the primary RCF comes on-line, the system attempts to select
sync_1 as the synchronization reference. If that source fails (or is not present) and
assuming that the DS1/DFI and carrier line associated with sync_2 are
operational (that is, DS1 1 is not insane and there is no alarm or only a minor,
misframe, slip, or 10e-6 error-ratio alarm on the carrier line), the system will select
sync_2 as the new synchronization reference.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-32
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
If neither sync_1 nor sync_2 is an acceptable synchronization reference, the
system will use an internal oscillator as the synchronization reference. That
oscillator, referred to as the local reference oscillator or just local oscillator, is
located on the CAT unit. It is a free-running oscillator running at the carrier line
rate of 2048 kHz. Since it is free running, that is, not locked (synchronized) to the
carrier lines, slips1 (which result in the repeat or loss of a frame of incoming data)
are bound to occur. For that reason, the fault preventing the use of an external
clock source should be isolated and corrected as soon as possible.
When a TDM bus is synchronized to the local reference, Cell Site system software
attempts to switch to the primary or secondary reference DS!/DFI every five
minutes. The switch will only proceed if the primary or secondary reference DS!/
DFI is now free of alarms and in the active state.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
PRIMARY
SYNC REF
FOR TDM1
AMPS/TDMA RCF0
AMPS/TDMA RCF1
TDM0
TDM1
SHELF 0
SHELF 1
0 REDUNDANT
SHELF 2
CAT UNITS
FOR TDM0
8-KHz
REF SIG
FANS
SHELF 3
SHELF 4
8-KHz
REF SIG
PRIMARY &
SECONDARY
SYNC REF
FOR TDM0
2 REDUNDANT
SHELF 5
= DS1 OR DFI
CAT UNITS
FOR TDM1
= CAT
Figure 11-12. Synchronization References for TDM0 and TDM1—Example
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-33
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
In the figure, the active (on-line) CPU sends a message to DS1 0 specifying that
the 8-kHz signal derived from the T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream be connected to
TDMSYNC1. Likewise, the active CPU sends a message to DS1 1 specifying that
the 8-kHz signal derived from the T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream be connected to
TDMSYNC2. The active CPU also writes the control register of the active NCI0 to
specify which of the two CATs is to supply the TDM system clocks. (The NCI uses
TDMCKSEL to activate the specified CAT.) And finally, the active CPU sends a
message to the active CAT specifying which synchronization reference is to
connect to the clock generator circuit.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-34
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
AYD3
P/O DS1 0 (SHELF 3, SLOT 12)
8-kHz CLOCK
DERIVED FROM
T1_0/ E1_0
BUS
TRANSCEIVERS
TDMSYNC2
TDMSYNC1
TDM0 BUS
PRIMARY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER/
ANGEL
FRAMER 0
LINE
INTErfACE
DEVICE 0
TO/ FROM
T1_0/ E1_0
PRIMARY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER/
FRAMER 1
LINE
INTErfACE
DEVICE 1
TO/ FROM
T1_1/ E1_1
(NOT USED)
TDMFR
TDMCLK
NC
SAKI
P/O DS1 1 (SHELF 4, SLOT 14)
SAME AS DFI ABOVE
P/O CAT 0 OR CAT 1 (SHELF 1 OR 2, SLOT 14)
TDMSYNC1
TDMSYNC2
TDMFR
TDMCLK
BUS
TRANSCEIVERS
SYNC SOURCE
REF SELECT
8-kHz REF(PHASE LOCK
LOOP)
2048 kHz
8 kHz
NC
BA4
CLOCK
GENERATOR
8-kHz LOC
SAKI
÷ BY
256
LOCAL
OSC
ANGEL
(2048
kHz)
ONLINE
* BA4 = 0 FOR CAT IN SHELF 1
BA4 = 1 FOR CAT IN SHELFBA4
2 = TDMCKSEL ‘ ACTIVE (ON-LINE) CAT
P/O NCI0 (SHELF 0, SLOT 8 OR 13)
TDMCKSEL
TDMCKFAIL
TDMCLK
TDMFR
SIDE ACTIVE
BUS
TRANSCEIVERS
CLOCK
MONITOR/
CONTROL
CONTROL CLK SRC SEL
REGISTER
CLK FAIL (2)
TO/ FROM
SYSTEM
BUS 0/1
SAKI
ARCHANGEL
DUAL-PORT MESSAGES
RAM
Figure 11-13. Synchronization of TDM0 to the MSC
For the active CAT, only TDMSYNC1, TDMSYNC2, and the 8-kHz LOC signals
are valid choices as the synchronization reference. For the standby (off-line) CAT,
only TDMFR is a valid choice as the synchronization reference; on-board
hardware forces TDMFR as the synchronization reference to keep the standby
clock generator in step with the active clock generator.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-35
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
The signal lines called out in the figure are summarized below:
TDMCKSEL
TDM clock select. Selects which of the two CAT units is to supply the TDM system
clocks. A logic 0 on TDMCKSEL selects CAT 0, while a logic 1 selects CAT 1. The
source of TDMCKSEL is the active NCI0, which sets the logic state of the signal
either (1) autonomously, if enabled by the active CPU, or (2) as directed by the
active CPU.
TDMCKFAIL
TDM clock failure. When asserted (logic 1), indicates the failure of one or both of
the TDM system clocks. The source of TDMCKFAIL is the active NCI 0, which
asserts the signal autonomously. (TDMCKFAIL is used to alert the attached TDMbus client units of a TDM bus clock failure.)
TDMCLK
TDM timeslot clock (2048 kHz). One of the two TDM system clocks supplied by
the active CAT. A negative transition indicates the beginning of a TDM timeslot.
TDMFR
TDM frame clock (8 kHz). One of the two TDM system clocks supplied by the
active CAT. A positive-going pulse marks the beginning of the last timeslot in a
TDM frame. (A TDM frame consists of 256 timeslots.)
TDMSYNC1
TDM bus synchronization reference 1. An 8-kHz framing signal derived from the
T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream, used to synchronize the TDM bus with the MSC.
This signal is sourced from DS1 0 as directed by the active CPU. TDMSYNC1
routes to both CAT units, where the active CAT uses the signal as a
synchronization reference to generate the TDM system clocks.
TDMSYNC2
TDM bus synchronization reference 2. An 8-kHz framing signal derived from the
T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream, used to synchronize the TDM bus with the MSC.
This signal is sourced from DS1 1 under command of the active CPU.
TDMSYNC2 routes to both CAT units, where the active CAT uses the signal as an
alternate synchronization reference to generate the TDM system clocks.
(TDMSYNC2 is an alternate signal to TDMSYNC1.)
There is another set of the same signal lines described above associated with
TDM1, NCI1, CAT 2, and CAT 3.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-36
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to
Cell Site Communications
For all Cell Releases prior to R5.1, the data and voice communications between
the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and the Cell Site are based on a DS1 (Digital
Signal - Level 1) interface facility. It is a bipolar return-to-zero signal at a 1.544-Mb/
s rate. A DS1 signal consists of 24 DS0 (Digital Signal - Level 0) channels. The
Cell Site data communication links are capable of operating at 9.6-kb/s, 56-kb/s,
or 64-kb/s rates.
A DS1 carrier link can accommodate 24 digital voice communication channels or
a combination of digital voice and data channels. For each DS1 link, the Radio
Channel frames (RCFs) must have 1 DS1 interface circuit. One DS1 link and an
interface circuit are needed for each of the 24 voice channels. Two data links are
required between the P-RCF and the MSC for reliability. This is best
accommodated by two DS1 links, with one data channel in each link. The two DS1
interface circuits needed in this arrangement are located on shelves 3 and 4 in the
P-RCF.
All Cell Site interfaces are digital, using DS1 boards with a Digital Cross-Connect
(DSX-1) interface. When the facility is a T1 carrier, the DSX-1 interface allows
connection directly to channel service units without the need for D4 channel
banks. If analog facilities are used, D4 banks would, however, be required. The
DSX-1 interface allows up to 660 feet between the DS1 board and the
interconnecting facility.
The DSX-1 interface also allows connection directly to microwave systems or to
fiber-optic systems such as the DDM-1000. For the physical connections between
the DS1 carrier facilities and each RCF, two cable/connector assemblies are used,
one for transmit and one for receive.
The cell R5.1 Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications (CEPT)
feature provides a Cell Site that can operate in “international mode”. A Cell Site
operated in the “domestic mode” communicates via the DS1 protocol over T1
facilities; a Cell Site operated in the “international mode” communicates via the
CEPT protocol over E1 facilities. A Cell Site operating in the “international mode”
can provide 30 channels for voice traffic.
A Cell Site operated in the “domestic mode” can use either a DS1 communication
circuit pack or a Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) circuit pack. A Cell Site operated
in the “international mode” must use the DFI circuit pack.
All data and voice communications between the MSC and Cell Sites operating in
the “international mode” are based on a CEPT interface facility. This is a high
density binary three signal at a 2.048-Mb/s rate. CEPT signal consists of 31 digital
signal channels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-37
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DS1, DFI, and CAT Circuit
Descriptions
This section presents circuit descriptions for the DS1, DFI, and CAT plug-in circuit
boards. The DS1 apparatus code is TN171, the DFI apparatus code is TN3500,
and the CAT apparatus code is TN170.
DS1 (TN171)
Circuit
Description
The DS1 provides the interface between the RCF TDM bus, TDM0 or TDM1, and
a T1 digital transmission line. The T1 line interface is the lowest level in the
hierarchy of the North American Tcarrier digital transmission facility, which
multiplexes twenty-four 64-kbit/s channels into a serial digital trunk (1544A kbit/s).
The DS1 architecture is based on (1) the LC1046 DS1 line interface, (2) a DS1
chip set consisting of four large-scale integration circuits, and (3) the 327DA
network processing element (NPE), all Lucent Technologies custom devices. The
DS1 chip set provides the complete interface between a DS1 line interface device
and 24 serial data channels that connect to the NPEs.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
DFI (TN3500)
Circuit
Description
The DFI provides the interface between the RCF TDM bus, TDM0 or TDM1, and
two T1 or E1 (CEPT-1)* digital transmission lines, although only one T1 or E1 line
interface is currently supported. The E1 line interface is the lowest level in the
hierarchy of the European E-carrier digital transmission facility, which multiplexes
thirty-two 64-kbit/s channels into a serial digital trunk (2048 kbit/s).
The DFI architecture is based on the following:
■
The T7290 T1/CEPT line interface
■
The T7230 primary access controller/framer (PAC) (See Figure 11-14)
■
The 327HB SCOTCH network processing element (SNPE).
All of which are Lucent Technologies custom devices. Each of the two PACs, one
for each carrier line, provides the complete interface between a T1/CEPT line
interface device and a serial data bus known as the concentration highway that
connects to the SNPEs.
Both the PAC and T1/CEPT line interface devices can be configured for T1 or E1
operation.
CEPT stands for Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications Administrations. CEPT-1 and E1 are
equivalent terms.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-38
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
The T1/CEPT line interface device along with transformers, impedance-matching
resistors, and manually set switches provide the digital transmission line interface
(Refer to Table 11-3). The switches allow for T1 120-ohm operation or E1120-ohm
or 75-ohm operation, as defined by the SW1 through SW5 switch settings in the
table. The receive line-interface transmission format (on the line side) is alternate
mark inversion (AMI), where a 1 is represented by either a positive or negative
pulse, and a 0 is represented by a null pulse (no pulse). All pulse shapes are
controlled by the T1/CEPT line interface device according to its equalizer control
inputs, as defined by the SW6 and SW7 switch settings in the table. The receive
digital output format (on the PAC side) is dual-rail nonreturn to zero (NRZ).
To set switches SW1 through SW7, ensure that the DFI is out-of-service and then
remove the DFI from its slot location. (There is no need to remove power from the
slot location.) The switches are located at the middle (SW1-SW5) and the
faceplate end (SW6, SW7) of the circuit board. Always wear a wrist grounding
strap when handling circuit boards.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
The PAC provides T1 or E1 framing, alarm reporting, performance monitoring,
jitter attenuation, loopback, and independent receive and transmit framer paths.
On the line interface side, the PAC receives dual-rail data and a receive line clock
from the T1/CEPT line interface device, converts the data to a transistor-transistor
logic (TTL) format, and then transmits the data onto the concentration highway
using the TDM timeslot clock (2048 kHz). On the system side (TDM bus side), the
PAC receives TTL data from the concentration highway at the TDM timeslot clock
rate, converts the data to the dual-rail format, and then transmits the data and a
transmit line clock (phase locked to the TDM timeslot clock) to the T1/CEPT line
interface device. The PAC also derives an 8-kHz signal from the receive line clock
to serve as a possible synchronization reference for the TDM clock source.
Both the PAC and the SNPE have a dual, high-speed, serial interface for
connection to two pairs of transmit and receive serial data buses known as
concentration highway A and concentration highway B. Data may be transmitted
or received on either one of these highways. In the DFI implementation, only
concentration highway A is used for data exchange between a PAC and an SNPE.
The highway operates as a 2048-kbit/s 32-timeslot serial bus where each timeslot
is 8-bits wide.
The SNPEs provide a programmable interface between the concentration
highways and the parallel TDM bus. The SNPEs can provide a connection
between any of the timeslots on the carrier line and any of the 251 timeslots on
highway A or B of the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-39
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
DFI (TN1713B)
Circuit Operation
Currently supplied DFI.
P/O TDM Bus Interface
Visual Indicators
Red LED
(Failure)
Addr (8)
Reset
Angel
(8-Bit Micro-
Secondary
Bus
Control
Processor)
Address
Latch
EA
SRAM
Yel LED
(Line Alm)
EEPROM
Addr / Data (8)
Grn LED
(Sync Src)
Addr Latch Enable
Addr (10)
PAC 0*
(8)
(8)
Transmit
Line
Encoder
Signaling
Inserter
Conc
Hwy A_0
LLB
8-KHz CLK_0
TDM CLOCKS
BLB
Receive
Line
Decoder
8-kHz CLOCK
Extracter &
Elastic Store
To
T1_0/ E1_0
T1/ CEPT
Line
Interface
Device 0
From
T1_0/ E1_0
SW6
SW2 SW5 SW1
SW7
SW4
SW3
PAC 1*
Transmit
Line
Encoder
Signaling
Inserter
Conc
Hwy A_1
LLB
8-kHz CLOCK
8-KHz CLK_1
TDM Clocks
Extracter &
Elastic Store
* Primary Access Controller/ Framer
BLB
Receive
Line
Decoder
To
T1_1/ E1_1
(Not Used)
T1/ CEPT
Line
Interface
Device 1
From
T1_1/ E1_1
(Not Used)
Figure 11-14. Primary Access Controller/Framer
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-40
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Table 11-3.
MODE
SW7-3
DFI Switch Settings
SW7-2
SW7-1
SW6-3
SW6-2
SW6-1
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
T1*
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E1 120
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Ohm
E1 75
Ohm†
†
The T1 line equalization, or line length compensation (determined by SW6 and SW7), is set for a
transmission distance of 0 to 133 feet between the DFI and its associated channel service unit
(CSU).
Since Lucent Technologies is using a balun device to accommodate E1 75-ohm operation, the DFI
switch settings for E1 75-ohm operation are the same as for E1 120-ohm operation. (A balun is an
impedance-matching device used to connect balanced twisted-pair cabling with unbalanced coaxial
cable.)
The SNPEs, under microprocessor control, can loop back any receive timeslot
data from the TDM bus to any transmit timeslot on the TDM bus. Transmit data will
continue to be sent to the carrier line but receive data will be discarded.
The T1/CEPT line interface devices, the PACs, the SNPEs, and the SAKI are
equipped with microprocessor interfaces that allow the on-board microprocessor
to configure, monitor, and test the devices. The microprocessor, which serves as
both the angel and main processor for the DFI, receives messages from the CPU
via the TDM bus. The microprocessor interprets the messages and then
addresses the appropriate device (or devices) to carry out the specified
configuration or maintenance functions.
Once the DFI has successfully completed its self test at powerup or after a reset,
only three messages will be required to set up a full-duplex connection: an
initialization message, a network-update “Talk” message, and a network-update
“Listen” message.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-41
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DFI Initialization Message for T1
Operation
The initialization message sets configuration parameters on the PAC and T1/
CEPT line interface devices and may specify a synchronization reference for the
TDM clocks. Configuration parameters for T1 operation include:
D4 or ESF Framing
To accommodate framing patterns, error detection, and signaling modes,
individual T1/DS1 frames are grouped together to form superframe structures
such as D4 and extended superframe (ESF). The D4 framing format uses a
superframe structure consisting of 12 frames, and the ESF framing format uses a
superframe structure consisting of 24 frames (See Figure 11-15, Sheets 1, 2, and
3).
The T1 framing configuration (D4 or ESF) is specified via translations.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-42
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
D4 Framing Format
Frame
Number
Bit
Number
F Bit*
Bit Use in Each Channel
Signaling Options†
Fs
F Traffic
YA‡
Signaling
None
2-ST
4-ST
–
1 Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
193
– Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
386
–
0 Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
579
– Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
772
–
1 Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
965
– Bits 1–7
Bit 2
Bit 8§
–
1158
–
0 Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
1351
– Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
1544
–
1 Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
10
1737
– Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
11
1930
–
0 Bits 1–8
Bit 2
None
–
–
–
12
2123
– Bits 1–7
Bit 2
Bit 8
–
†
F bit sequence is Fs sequence interleaved with Ft sequence.
Signaling option None: No robbed-bit signaling (bit 8 is used for traffic).
Signaling option 2-ST: 2-state signaling (channel A only).
Signaling option 4-ST: 4-state signaling (channels A and B).
‡ Remote yellow alarm – Bit 2 of each channel is set to a 0.
§ Robbed-bit signaling.
** Remote Japanese yellow alarm – Fs bit in frame 12 is set to a 1.
Figure 11-15. Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format
(Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-43
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Frame
Number
Bit
Number
F Bit*
Bit Use in Each
Channel
Signaling Options†
CR
Traffic
Signaling
‡
No
ne
2ST
4ST
16ST
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
193
–
–
C1
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
386
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
579
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
772
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
965
–
–
C2
Bits 1–
7‡
Bit 8‡
–
1158
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
1351
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
1544
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
10
1737
–
–
C3
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
11
1930
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
12
2123
–
–
Bits 1–
7‡
Bit 8‡
–
13
2316
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
14
2509
–
–
C4
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
15
2702
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
16
2895
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
17
3088
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
18
3281
–
–
C5
Bits 1–
7‡
Bit 8‡
–
19
3474
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
20
3667
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
21
3860
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
22
4053
–
–
C6
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
23
4246
–
–
Bits 1–8
None
–
–
–
–
24
4439
–
–
Bits 1–
7‡
Bit 8‡
–
Figure 11-16. Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format
(Sheet 2 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-44
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
CEPT-1, for Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications administrations, is the
lowest level of hierarchy in the European E-carrier system. CEPT-1 and E1 are equivalent terms.
Frame and Multiframe. The following illustration shows the basic CCITT CEPT frame and
multiframe structures.
Timeslot 0
FR 0
FR 1
Timeslot 1
FR 2
8-Bit Timeslot, or Channel – 3.91 µs
Timeslot 31
256-Bit Frame – 125 µs
FR 15 16-Multiframe – 2 ms
The CCITT CEPT framing format consists of thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots, or channels,
resulting in a 256-bit frame and a line rate of 2048 kbit/s (CEPT-1 rate). Framing
information is carried in timeslot 0 (TS0), while local exchange carrier (LEC) signaling
information, if used, is carried in timeslot 16 (TS16).
Framing information is contained in the TS0 frame alignment signal (FAS) word and the
TS0 not-word. The TS0 FAS word is defined as the TS0 byte containing a 0011011
pattern in bit positions 2 through 8. The TS0 not-word is defined as the TS0 byte that
does not contain the FAS pattern. TS0 FAS-word frames interleave with TS0 not-word
frames, as shown in the facing table.
The CCITT CEPT line may contain both a TS0 and a TS16 multiframe. Both multiframes
consist of 16 frames.
TS0 Multiframe. The TS0 multiframe, also known as the cyclic redundancy check
(CRC) multiframe, is used in systems that use the CRC-4 error checking, which is an
enhanced error-monitoring capability providing for additional protection against
emulation of the FAS-word pattern. The multiframe is divided into two submultiframes,
each consisting of eight frames. The multiframe is found by looking for the 001011
pattern in bit position 1 of TS0. This pattern is interleaved with the CRC-4 bits.
Note that association of frame numbers to TS0s is only applicable to the CEPT format
with CRC-4. In CEPT without CRC-4, only two types of names can be identified: frames
containing the TS0 FAS word, and frames not containing the TS0 FAS word (the TS0
not-word).
Figure 11-17. Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format
(Sheet 3 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-45
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
ZCS or B8ZS Line Format
T1 standards require an average of at least one 1 in every eight bits of transmitted
data. The T1 framing format uses zero code suppression (ZCS) or binary 8 zero
substitution (B8ZS) to meet this requirement. The ZCS scheme inserts a 1 after
every seventh-consecutive 0 to keep the density of 1s high enough to preserve
accurate timing at the remote endpoint. The remote endpoint removes the
inserted 1.
The B8ZS scheme is used for those applications requiring clear-channel
transmission*. When eight consecutive 0s occur in a bit stream, the B8ZS scheme
replaces the eight 0s with a specific pattern to keep the density of 1s high enough
to preserve accurate timing at the remote endpoint. The remote endpoint
recognizes the pattern and replaces it with the original string of eight 0s.
The T1 line format configuration (ZCS or B8ZS) is specified via translations.
Line-length Compensation Setting
There are five line-length compensation settings for T1 operation: 0 to 133 feet,
134 to 266 feet, 267 to 399 feet, 400 to 533 feet, and 534 to 655 feet. A line-length
compensation setting offsets the cable loss in the path between the DFI and its
associated channel service unit (CSU).
The line-length compensation setting is specified via translations.
Before a DFI is initialized, that is, during powerup or after a reset (at which time
the DFI is transmitting an all 1s signal, or blue alarm, onto the T1 line), the DFI
transmits in accordance to the line-length compensation setting of on-board
switches SW6 and SW7. Once the DFI is initialized, it transmits in accordance to
the line-length compensation setting specified in translations.
Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB Control
Line loopback (LLB), board loopback (BLB), or both can be enabled so that the
loopback can be invoked on demand through the microprocessor interface. The
LLB loops the received signal from the line back to the transmit side without
removing bipolar violations; a blue alarm (all 1s) is sent to the system (toward
TDM bus). When BLB is enabled, the system data is fully processed by PAC and
is then looped back to the system, but is not transmitted to the line; a blue alarm is
sent to the line.
Clear-channel transmission means that the full capacity of the T1 line is available to the user, that is, no portion of
the channel is reserved for carrier framing or control bits.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-46
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Enabling or disabling of on-demand LLB/BLB control is not translatable. Cell Site
system software disables this configuration option for both PAC devices.
Select Synchronization Reference
The 8-kHz signal derived from the received T1 data can be supplied back to the
TDM clock source on the CAT.
Selecting a synchronization reference is not translatable. Cell Site system
software determines whether the DFI is selected as a synchronization reference.
Specify Idle Code
All inactive T1 transmit timeslots will contain an idle code, which is a
programmable 8-bit pattern.
Selecting an idle code is not translatable. Cell Site system software sets the idle
code to 11111110.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-47
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DFI Initialization Message for E1
Operation
The initialization message sets configuration parameters on the PAC and T1/
CEPT line interface devices and may specify a synchronization reference for the
TDM clocks. Configuration parameters for E1 operation include:
CEPT Framing
with or without
CRC-4 Error
Checking
To accommodate framing patterns, error detection, and signaling modes, 16
individual CEPT frames are grouped together to form a multiframe structure. Two
different multiframe formats are defined: one associated with timeslot 0 (TS0) and
the other associated with timeslot 16 (TS16). The TS0 multiframe structure
provides an error checking capacity using a CRC-4 algorithm as defined by
CCITT Recommendation G.704 (See Figure 11-18).
The CEPT framing configuration (with or without CRC-4 error checking) is
specified via translations.
CCS or CAS
Signaling Mode
Common-channel signaling (CCS) and channel-associated signaling (CAS) are
signaling modes associated with the TS16 multiframe structure. In the CCS mode,
TS16 is available to carry user (digital-voice) data. In the CAS mode, TS16 is
reserved for local exchange carrier (LEC) signaling and therefore is not available
to carry user data.
The CEPT signaling mode (CCS or CAS) is specified via translations.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-48
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Bit Use in TS0
Frame
Number
Bit Use in TS16
C1/
Si
X0
Ym
X1
X2
0 /Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A1
B1
C1
D1
A17
B17
C17
D17
C2/
Si
A2
B2
C2
D2
A18
B18
C18
D18
0 /Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A3
B3
C3
D3
A19
B19
C19
D19
C3/
Si
A4
B4
C4
D4
A20
B20
C20
D20
1 /Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A5
B5
C5
D5
A21
B21
C21
D21
C4/
Si
A6
B6
C6
D6
A22
B22
C22
D22
0 /Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A7
B7
C7
D7
A23
B23
C23
D23
C1/
Si
A8
B8
C8
D8
A24
B24
C24
D24
1 /Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A9
B9
C9
D9
A25
B25
C25
D25
10
C2/
Si
A10
B10
C10
D10
A26
B26
C26
D26
11
1 /Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A11
B11
C11
D11
A27
B27
C27
D27
12
C3/
Si
A12
B12
C12
D12
A28
B28
C28
D28
13
E/
Si
Yf
Sa4
Sa5
Sa6
Sa7
Sa8
A13
B13
C13
D13
A29
B29
C29
D29
Ai—Di
C1—C4
Si
—
—
—
—
Per-channel signaling bits
CRC-4 bits
Remote end block error bits
International spare bits
Sa4—Sa8
X0—X2
Yf
Ym
—
—
—
—
Additional spare bits for national use
X spare bits
Remote frame alarm (RFA) bit (active high)
Remote multiframe alarm (RMA) bit (active high)
Figure 11-18. Information Sheets for CCITT CEPT Frame Format
With and Without CRC-4
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-49
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
HDB3 or
Transparent Line
Format
CEPT standards require an average of at least one 1 in every eight bits of
transmitted data. The CEPT framing format uses high-density binary 3 (HDB3)
zero code suppression to meet this requirement. When four consecutive 0s occur
in a bit stream, the HDB3 scheme replaces the four 0s with a specific pattern to
keep the density of 1s high enough to preserve accurate timing at the remote
endpoint. The remote endpoint recognizes the pattern and replaces it with the
original string of four 0s. In contrast, the transparent line format allows the transmit
bit stream to pass through without being modified.
The CEPT line format configuration (HDB3 or transparent) is specified via
translations.
Enable or Disable
On-demand LLB
or BLB Control
Line loopback (LLB), board loopback (BLB), or both can be enabled so that the
loopback can be invoked on demand through the microprocessor interface. The
LLB loops the received signal from the line back to the transmit side without
removing bipolar violations; an alarm indication signal (AIS, all 1s) is sent to the
system (toward TDM bus). When BLB is enabled, the system data is fully
processed by PAC and is then looped back to the system, but is not transmitted to
the line; an AIS is sent to the line.
Enabling or disabling of on-demand LLB/BLB control is not translatable. Cell Site
system software disables this configuration option for both PAC devices.
Select
Synchronization
Reference
The 8-kHz signal derived from the received CEPT data can be supplied back to
the TDM clock source on the CAT.
Select Idle Code
All inactive CEPT transmit timeslots will contain an idle code, which is a
programmable 8-bit pattern.
Selecting a synchronization reference is not translatable. Cell Site system
software determines whether the DFI is selected as a synchronization reference.
Selecting an idle code is not translatable. Cell Site system software sets the idle
code to 11111110.
DFI NetworkUpdate Talk
Message
A network-update “Talk” message is required to select a digital facilities receive
timeslot and assign it to a TDM transmit timeslot. (This message is used to
program the SNPEs.) It defines the timeslot of the carrier line that the DFI will
receive data from and the timeslot of the TDM bus to which it will be transmitted.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
DFI NetworkUpdate Listen
Message
A network-update “Listen” message is required to select a TDM receive timeslot
and assign it to a digital facilities transmit timeslot. (This message is used to
program the SNPEs.) It defines the timeslot of the TDM bus that the DFI will
receive data from and the timeslot of the carrier line to which it will be transmitted.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-50
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DFI Status Indicators
The DFI faceplate has three light-emitting diode (LED) indicators, one red, one
yellow, and one green. Their meanings are as follows:
Red LED
Controlled by the DFI; lighted during the self-test initiated upon powerup or after a
reset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test; lighted during
normal operation if the DFI is insane.
Yellow LED
Controlled by Cell Site system software; lighted if the DFI detects any alarm other
than a minor, misframe, or slip alarm for T1 operation (or a 10e-6 error-ratio or slip
alarm for E1 operation) on the line connected to the DFI.
Green LED
Controlled by Cell Site system software; the DFI selected as a synchronization
reference has this LED lighted; only one DFI (or DS1) can have the green LED
lighted for the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1); if the local oscillator on the CAT is the
synchronization reference for the TDM bus, no DFI (or DS1) will have its green
LED lighted for that bus.
During normal operation and assuming the DFI is not the synchronization
reference, all three of its LEDs should be off. Also, as a troubleshooting aid, if the
red and yellow LEDs are lighted, suspect that the line switches on the DFI are set
to the wrong settings.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-51
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
CAT (TN170) Circuit Description
The CAT performs three independent functions:
1.
Bus clock generation and monitoring for the TDM bus
2.
Maintenance tone generation
3.
Maintenance tone detection and measurement.
These functions are implemented by the TDM bus clock generator circuit, the tone
generator circuit, and the tone detector circuit .
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-52
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
TDM BUS INTERFACE
TDM0/1 BUS
TDMSYNC1
TDMSYNC2
TDMFR
TDMCLK
BUS
TRANSCEIVERS
BA4
DATA (8)
NPE
(NETWORK
PROCESSING
ELEMENT)
DATA (8)
TX/RX
CONTROL
PORT 2 DATA
512-kHz CLK
RED LED
(FAILURE)
SAKI
(BUS SANITY
AND
CONTROL
(HARDWIRED
SLOT ADDR) INTERFACE)
ANA
GRN LED
(ACT CLK)
GRD
(ANGEL
MODE)
ADDR LATCH ENABLE
ADDR/ DATA (8)
RESET
ADDRESS
LATCH
ANGEL
(8-BIT MICROPROCESSOR)
EPROM
(BOOT)
SRAM
ADDR (8)
EA
B (NOTE)
NOTE: TDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUS
M TO/ FROM SHEET 2
Figure 11-19. CAT Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-53
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
TDM BUS CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUIT
SYNC SOURCE
REF SELECT
TDMSYNC1
TDMSYNC2
TDMFR
TDMCLK
LOCAL OSC
(2048 kHz)
CLOCK
GENERATOR
8-kHz REF
(PHASE LOCK
LOOP)
÷ BY
8-kHz LOC
2048 kHz
8 kHz
256
TONE GENERATOR CIRCUIT
TIMESLOT
COUNTER*
SERIAL IN/
PARALLEL
OUT
TG DSP
BUS
INTERFACE
CONTROL
TONE
ENB
TABLE
(DUAL-PORT
RAM)
COUNT
GENERATOR
TIMESLOT
TABLE
(DUAL-PORT
RAM)
2 BUS A/B SELECT
8-BIT
COUNTER*
ENB
ADDR/ DATA (8)
TONE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
PORT 2 DATA
512-kHz CLK
TD DSP
I/O
INTERFACE
8-MHz
OSC
ADDR (8)
* 8-BIT COUNTER (COUNTS FROM 0 TO 255)
Figure 11-20. CAT Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-54
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
M TO/ FROM SHEET 1
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Bus Clock Generation and Monitoring
for the TDM Bus
The TDM bus clock generator circuit provides an 8-kHz frame clock and a 2048kHz timeslot clock for the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1). Possible synchronization
references are the 8-kHz frame clock (TDMFR ), 2 8-kHz signals derived from the
carrier lines via the DS1 or DFI (TDMSYNC1 and TDMSYNC2 ), and the 8-kHz
signal derived from the on-board local reference oscillator (8-kHz LOC ).
The TDM bus clock generator circuit monitors both the 8-kHz reference signal and
the 8-kHz output clock of the phase lock loop (PLL) to determine when a slip
occurs and to record the number of slips. A slip is declared when the 8-kHz output
clock of the PLL moves one clock cycle ahead or one clock cycle behind the 8-kHz
reference signal. (Presumably, this happens when the 8-kHz reference signal has
a large degree of jitter, or is out of the frequency range of the PLL.) The CAT
declares a loss of signal when a specified number of slips occur in any 5-ms
period; the default value upon powerup or after a reset is 10.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-55
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Maintenance Tone Generation
The tone generator circuit provides test tones for system diagnostics and
maintenance. These tones are transmitted on the TDM bus for detection and
measurement by the tone detector circuit. There are two tone-generator sources:
the tone generator digital signal processor (TG DSP) and the count generator.
The TG DSP generates the following tones:
404Hz at-16 dBm
1004Hz at-16 dBm
1004Hz at 0 dBm
2804Hz at-16 dBm
1000Hz at 0 dBm (digital miliwatt).*
The TG DSP generates new values for each tone every TDM bus frame (125
microseconds) and stores them in the tone table. The tone table is a dual-port
RAM that is written by the TG DSP and read by the timeslot table (also a dual-port
RAM). The tone table is logically split into two RAMs; the TG DSP writes into one
half, while the timeslot table supplies an address to read the other half. Every
TDM bus frame, special hardware alternates the TG-DSP and timeslot-table
access to each half of memory, to guarantee that stable data is written to the TDM
bus.
Both the angel microprocessor and the timeslot counter access the timeslot table.
The address of each of the 256 memory locations in the timeslot table is
associated with a timeslot on the TDM bus. To enable a tone x on timeslot y, the
angel microprocessor writes an 8-bit code for tone x into address y of the timeslot
table. The 8-bit code consists of six address bits for the tone table, one of which
also enables the tone table (and disables the count generator), and two bus-select
bits that determine whether the tone table connects to highway A or highway B, or
both. The timeslot counter, which is incremented by the TDM timeslot clock (2048
kHz), supplies the addresses (0 through 255) to read the timeslot table.
To enable the count generator on timeslot y, the angel microprocessor writes an 8bit code into address y of the timeslot table. The 8-bit code consists of five unused
bits, one bit that enables the count generator (and disables the tone table), and
two bus-select bits that determine whether the count generator connects to
highway A or highway B, or both. The count generator, which is clocked by the
TDM frame clock (8 kHz), continually cycles through a count of 0 through 255.
The digital miliwatt, or dmW, is a 1-kHz sine-wave tone at a power level of 1 miliwatt (0 dBm). It is the standard
reference level generated by eight 8-bit words as defined by the CCITT.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-56
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Maintenance Tone
Detection and
Measurement
The tone detector circuit consists of a tone detector digital signal processor (TD
DSP), an angel input/output interface, and an 8-MHz oscillator. Port 2 of the
network processing element (NPE) supplies the tone/count data from the TDM
bus to the TD DSP. The angel commands the TD DSP to detect and measure a
specific tone/count, and the DSP returns the measurement value to the angel.
The angel programs the NPE in accordance to two messages received from the
CPU: a network-update “Listen” message and a network-update “Talk” message.
A network-update “Listen” message defines the timeslot of the TDM bus from
which the tone detector circuit will receive data. A network-update “Talk” message
defines the timeslot of the TDM bus onto which the output of the tone generator
circuit will be transmitted. The NPE controls when data is transmitted to and
received from the TDM bus via the Tx/Rx control circuit.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-57
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
CAT Status Indicators
The CAT faceplate has two LED indicators, one red and one green. Their
meanings are as follows:
Red LED
This indicator is controlled by the CAT. The indicator is lighted during the self-test
initiated upon powerup or after a reset and goes off after successful completion of
the self-test; lighted during normal operation if the CAT is insane.
Green LED
This indicator is controlled by Cell Site system software. The CAT selected as the
TDM clock source has this LED lighted. The CPU sends a message to the NCI
(NCI 0 for TDM0 and NCI1 for TDM1) specifying which of the two CATs is to supply
the TDM system clocks for the bus. The NCI, in turn, uses the TDMCKSEL control
line to activate the specified CAT.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-58
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Automatic Recovery Actions
All Cell Site faults fall into one of two categories, depending on the way they are
handled:
■
Those faults dealt with initially by the Cell Site, where there may or may not
be follow-up action by the technician
■
Those faults dealt with only by the technician.
The first category of faults involves Cell Site equipment having associated
software diagnostic tests. The second category of faults pertains to scanned
alarms, which are faults gathered from Cell Site equipment having no associated
software diagnostic tests. This section deals with a subset of the first category of
faults. Specifically, this section describes automatic recovery actions for the RCC,
DS1/ DFI, and CAT.
The RCC contains software that takes automatic recovery actions (corrective
actions) upon fault recognition. Recovery includes fault isolation and
reconfiguration.
The recovery actions are dependent on the fault type. The RCC may take the
suspect unit out-of-service and perform a diagnostic test on it. If the unit fails the
diagnostic test, it is left in the out-of-service state. If the faulty unit belongs to the
RCC controller, the entire controller is taken out-of-service, and its redundant
mate is made the active controller.
The RCC reports the Cell Site faults to the ECP, including the results of RCCinitiated diagnostic tests. The RCC also reports any change in equipment
(hardware) status as a result of the recovery action.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-59
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Hardware Error Handling Strategy
The automatic recovery actions in the RCC are done through the hardware error
handler (HEH) software subsystem. HEH receives errors from hardware units,
functional tests, and call-processing software. It determines when a recovery
action (restore or remove) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the
action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, either HEH takes immediate recovery
action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined number of times before
taking action. For other errors, HEH prints only an error report.
A throttling mechanism at the cell limits the number of alarms reported on a per
board basis to the ECP. Within each 15-minute period, HEH reports no more than
one alarm for any particular board.
HEH performs the following types of error analysis:
Immediate Action
For severe errors that are service-affecting, such as loss of communication
between the MSC and the cell, HEH takes immediate action. For most on-board
hardware errors, HEH will request a conditional restore of the suspect unit.
The conditional restore maintenance action schedules an event or process to
restore the suspect unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test. If the unit fails the
diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. The failed unit remains in the outof-service state.
All Tests Pass
(ATP) Analysis
For an HEH-initiated conditional restore request, if the unit passes all diagnostic
tests, the unit is restored to service, and HEH adds a count to an ATP counter for
the unit. If that count exceeds an assigned threshold within a predefined time
period (typically three in 40 minutes or five in 24 hours), HEH will request a
conditional remove of the unit. (Possibly, the diagnostic tests for the unit are not
robust enough to detect the problem, or the problem is external to the unit.) This
type of error analysis prevents a recovery cycle that might otherwise continue
indefinitely.
Single Timeperiod Analysis
Refers to the use of error counters assigned to each hardware unit (DS1, DFI,
CAT, and so on). If an error count for a unit remains below a predefined threshold
for a specific period of time, HEH clears the counter. This type of error analysis is
based on the theory that if a unit has remained reliable for an extended period of
time, its error history should be forgotten completely. A timer value of 40 minutes
is used.
Fail/Pass Analysis
HEH performs this type of error analysis on call-processing detected errors such
as voice channel confirmation failures. When the number of failures exceeds
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-60
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
some predefined value relative to the number of successful attempts (such as
2400 failures in 4000 attempts), HEH takes recovery action.
Leaky Bucket
Analysis
Refers to the decrementing of non-zero error counters for the configurable
hardware units. The decrementing is done at set time intervals. This technique is
more flexible than a simple analysis based on the number of errors in a single
fixed period of time.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-61
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
RCC Hardware Errors and Recovery
Actions
A fault within any of the units of the active RCC controller causes HEH to shut
down the controller and to activate the mate RCC controller, assuming the mate
RCC controller is in the standby state. If the mate RCC controller is out-of-service,
HEH takes no action other than to unconditionally remove the active RCC; at that
point, both RCCs would be out-of-service.
Assuming the mate RCC is in standby, HEH conditionally restores the active RCC
to standby. This action spawns the following actions:
■
A switch request that moves the active RCC to standby and the mate RCC
to the active state.
■
A remove request that moves the standby RCC to the out-of-service state.
■
A diagnose request that diagnoses the out-of-service RCC; if successful,
results in the RCC being restored to the standby state; if not successful,
results in the RCC remaining in the out-of-service state.
NOTE:
The assumption here is that the active RCC is faulty. If, in fact, the standby
RCC is faulty, HEH will conditionally restore the standby RCC to standby—
no switching of RCC sides will occur.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-62
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DS1/DFI Hardware Errors and
Recovery Actions
The DS1 or DFI provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion
between the carrier lines and the TDM buses internal to the RCF frames. It also
provides the external clock source by which all data and signaling transfers are
synchronized over the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1).
The automatic fault-recovery procedure for a DS1/DFI depends upon the fault
type for T1 operation and for E1 operation.
Throughout this section, the term “DS1” will be used to collectively represent both
the DS1 and DFI units. Only when there is a need to distinguish between the DS1
and the DFI units will the term “DFI” be used.
HEH sends a slip count inquiry message to the DS1 every half hour, to which the
DS1 responds with the number of slip conditions it has recorded during the last
half hour. If the number of slip conditions is 44 or greater for a DS1 supplying
synchronization for the TDM bus, HEH will change the synchronization reference
to another DS1 or to local (for local oscillator) if no DS1 synchronization reference
is available. This action may occur any time up to one half hour after HEH receives
a DS1 slip count of 44 or greater. If the DS1 slip count exceeds 88, HEH will take
action immediately.
In addition, HEH sends a misframe count inquiry message* to the DS1 every half
hour, to which the DS1 responds with the number of misframe conditions it has
recorded during the last half hour. If the number of misframe conditions is nine or
greater for a DS1 supplying synchronization for the TDM bus, HEH will change the
synchronization reference to another DS1 or to local if no DS1 synchronization
reference is available. This action may occur any time up to one half hour after
HEH receives a DS1 misframe count of nine or greater. If the DS1 misframe count
exceeds 17, HEH will take action immediately.
When a TDM bus is synchronized to local, HEH will attempt to switch to the
primary or secondary reference DS1 every five minutes. The switch will only
proceed if the primary or secondary reference DS1 is now free of alarms and in
the active state.
T1 operation only. HEH does not send a misframe count inquiry message to a DFI configured for E1 operation.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-63
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DS1/DFI and T1 Errors—Detailed
Description
This section describes alarms, error reporting, and performance monitoring
functions performed by the DS1. In addition, this section discusses the
subsequent actions that are taken by the DS1 as a result of various alarm
conditions. For important background information concerning T1/DS1 frame
structure as well as two types of superframe structures known as D4 and
extended superframe (ESP).
The DS1 reports autonomously certain error conditions and statistics when a
change of state occurs or a threshold is exceeded. The DS1 effectively filters the
alarms to avoid reporting spurious conditions; that is, an alarm has to occur a
certain amount times within a given time frame before the DS1 will report the
alarm. The DS1 will report only the most serious of any alarms that may be
present at any particular time. The DS1 will also report autonomously when an
alarm ceases (deactivates).
Loss Of Signal
(LOS)
The DS1 cannot detect the received signal on the T1 line. The DS1 inhibits the
updating of the received signaling information from the T1 line. (That is, the DS1
blocks the signal of the T1 port to, but not from, the timeslots on the TDM bus
carrying digital-voice or signaling for the T1 port.) It also begins transmitting a
yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port.
The DS1 declares an LOS when it cannot detect a data signal for approximately
one second, and deactivates LOS when the data signal is present for
approximately 16 seconds.
Blue Alarm
The DS1 is receiving an all-1s pattern on the T1 line. The DS1 inhibits the
updating of the received signaling information from the T1 line. It also begins
transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port.
The DS1 declares a blue alarm when it detects an all-1s pattern for approximately
two seconds, and deactivates the blue alarm when the condition is clear for
approximately 16 seconds.
The DS1, itself, will transmit a blue alarm to the remote endpoint during board
initialization, that is, during the on-board self-test initiated upon powerup or after a
system reset.
Red Alarm
The DS1 cannot detect the framing pattern in the received signal on the T1 line.
The DS1 inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the T1
line. It also begins transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the
port.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-64
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
The DS1 declares a red alarm when it detects framing errors for approximately
three seconds, and deactivates the red alarm when the condition is clear for
approximately 16 seconds.
In D4 or ESF, a framing error occurs when any two of four, or two of six,
consecutive frame synchronization bits (Fs or Ft in D4, Fe in ESF) are in error.
Major Alarm
The received signal on the T1 line has a bit error ratio exceeding 10e-3 over a
predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate exceeds 1 in 1000 bits.) The
DS1 begins transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port,
but transmission and reception over the T1 line proceed with no interruption at this
end of the connection.
The bit error ratio is measured with framing bit errors in D4 and with CRC errors in
ESF. In D4, the DS1 declares a major alarm when the error ratio exceeds 10e-3
for 16 seconds, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been
reached for 16 seconds. In ESF, the DS1 declares a major alarm when the error
ratio exceeds 10e-3 for 6 seconds, and deactivates the alarm when the clear
threshold has been reached for 6 seconds.
Yellow Alarm
The DS1 is receiving a yellow alarm signal from the remote endpoint (that is, the
other endpoint has an LOS, blue alarm, red alarm, or major alarm condition,
although there are no problems at this endpoint). The DS1 takes no action other
than reporting this alarm.
The DS1 reports a yellow alarm condition when the condition persists for
approximately 0.4 seconds, and negates the report when the yellow alarm
condition has ceased for approximately 0.4 seconds.
In D4, a yellow alarm is indicated by a 0 in bit 2 of all incoming channels. In ESF, a
yellow alarm is indicated by an alternating pattern of eight 1s and eight 0s on the
4-kbit/s data link (DL).
The DS1 cannot determine when receiving a yellow alarm whether the channels
are usable—they would be if there were a major alarm at the other end—or not
usable—they would not be if one of the other conditions were in effect.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-65
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Fan Alarms
Preamp Fan
All preamp fans in the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) are powered from two of the
four 20A DC feeders which supply power to the LAC 0 position in the frame.
Preamp fans will not have power if the breakers to LAC 0 are open.
To avoid overheating the preamps, do not power down LAC 0 for more than a few
minutes if other Linear Amplifier Modules (LACs) are powered. If LAC 0 needs to
be powered down for an extended period of time, disconnect the J1 power cable
from LAC 0 (LAC 4 in LAF1), and close the two 20A breakers which supply
connector J1.
Symptoms:
C-Series LACs:
Major Alarm
LAC LEDS = FANS and PREAMP
A/B-Series LACs:
Minor Alarm
LAC LEDS = LINEARIZER
Procedure:
Check that all 20A breakers feeding LAC 0 (LAC 4 in LAF1) are closed.
If a fan is stopped, check its wiring. Check the fan for blockage.
Check the 24-volt DC voltage on connector J1 supplying LAC 0. If normal, the fan
should be replaced. Replace both preamp fans at the same time, even if the other
fan is working normally.
LineariZeR Fan
Procedure
Symptoms:
C-Series LACs:
Major Alarm
LAC LEDS = FANS and LINEARIZER
A/B-Series LACs:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-66
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Minor Alarm
LAC LEDS = LINEARIZER
Procedure:
Check the LINEARIZER FAN fuse on the front panel of the LineariZeR (LZR).
Replace with a new fuse, if blown.
If the fuse is good, remove the front grille from the LZR and carefully check to see
if the fan is turning. The fan is located on the far right side of the LZR cabinet.
Check the fan wiring for shorts or opens. If none are found, replace the fan.
LAU Fan
Procedure
Symptoms:
C-Series LACs:
Major Alarm
LAC LEDS = FANS and LAU
A/B-Series LACs:
Minor Alarm
LAC LEDS = LAU
Procedure:
Check the LINEAR AMPLIFIER UNIT FAN fuse on the front panel of the
LineariZeR (LZR) (Figure 4-17). Replace it with a new fuse, if blown.
If the fuse is good, check to see if the fan is turning. Check for blockage. Remove
a few Linear Amplifier Modules (LAMs) at the top of the Linear Amplifier Unit
(LAU) and check the DC voltage at the inductor terminals. If the voltage is greater
than 22V, replace the fan. If the voltage is less than 22V, check the DC power
cabling.
Measuring the
Linear Amplifier
Unit (LAU) Fan
Voltage
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-67
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DS1 Errors
Minor Alarm
The received signal on the T1 line has a bit error ratio between 10e-3 and 10e-6
over a predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate is less than 1 in 1000
bits but exceeds 1 in 1,000,000 bits.) The DS1 takes no action other than
reporting this alarm.
The bit error ratio is measured with framing bit errors in D4 and with CRC errors in
ESF. In D4, the DS1 declares a minor alarm when the error ratio exceeds 10e-6
for 41 minutes, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been
reached for 41 minutes. In ESF, the DS1 declares a minor alarm when the error
ratio exceeds 10e-6 for 10 minutes, and deactivates the alarm when the clear
threshold has been reached for 10 minutes.
Misframe Count
The number of framing bit errors detected by the DS1 since the last system
inquiry. The DS1 will report the number of misframes autonomously whenever the
number of misframes reaches 17. The misframe count will be reset (misframe
count = 0) when the DS1 receives a Misframe Count Inquiry message from the
CPU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-68
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
DFI and E1 Errors - Detailed
Description
This section describes alarms, error reporting, and performance monitoring
functions performed by the DFI configured for E1 operation. In addition, this
section discusses the subsequent actions that are taken by the DFI as a result of
various alarm conditions.
The DFI reports the following autonomous alarms to HEH:*
Loss Of Signal
(LOS)
The DFI cannot detect the received signal on the E1 line. The DFI inhibits the
updating of the received signaling information from the E1 line. (That is, the DFI
blocks the signal of the E1 port to, but not from, the timeslots on the TDM bus
carrying digital-voice or signaling for the E1 port.) It also begins transmitting a
remote frame alarm (RFA) signal to the remote endpoint of the port.
The DFI declares an LOS when it cannot detect a data signal for approximately
2.4 seconds, and deactivates LOS when the data signal is present for
approximately 12 seconds.
Alarm Indication
Signal (AIS)
The DFI is receiving an all-1s pattern on the E1 line. The DFI inhibits the updating
of the received signaling information from the E1 line. It also begins transmitting
an RFA signal to the remote endpoint of the port.
The DFI declares an AIS when it detects an all-1s pattern for approximately 0.6
seconds, and deactivates AIS when the condition is clear for approximately 0.2
seconds.
The DFI, itself, will transmit an AIS signal to the remote endpoint during board
initialization, that is, during the on-board self-test initiated upon powerup or after a
reset.
Loss of Frame
Alignment (LFA)
The DFI cannot detect the framing pattern in the received signal on the E1 line.
The DFI inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the E1
line. It also begins transmitting an RFA signal to the remote endpoint of the port.
The DFI declares an LFA when it detects framing errors for approximately 2.4
seconds, and deactivates LFA when the condition is clear for approximately 12
seconds.
A framing error is defined as an incorrect bit in one of the seven framing bits in the
timeslot 0 (TS0) frame alignment signal (FAS) word or an error in bit 2 of the TS0
For any DFI autonomous alarm except the 10e-6 error-ratio alarm and slip count, Cell Site system software will
turn on the DFI’s yellow LED.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-69
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
not-word. The DFI begins a sequential search for new framing candidates, starting
one bit position beyond the position where the LFA was detected and continuing
until a valid candidate is found.
Loss of Multiframe
Alignment (LMA)
The DFI cannot detect the multiframe alignment pattern (for the multiframe
selected) in the received signal on an E1 line. The DFI inhibits the updating of the
received signaling information from the E1 line. For a timeslot 16 (TS16) LMA, it
also begins transmitting a remote multiframe alarm (RMA) signal to the remote
endpoint of the port.
The DFI declares a TS0 LMA when an error has occurred in the 6-bit multiframe
pattern (001011 interleaved with the CRC-4 bits) for approximately 2.4 seconds,
and deactivates TS0 LMA when TS0 multiframe alignment has recovered for
approximately 12 seconds.
The DFI declares a TS16 LMA when an error has occurred in the 4-bit multiframe
alignment signal (MAS) pattern for approximately 2.4 seconds, and deactivates
TS16 LFA when TS16 multiframe alignment has recovered for approximately 12
seconds.
10e-3 Error-ratio
Alarm
The received signal on the E1 line has a bit error ratio exceeding 10e-3 over a
predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate exceeds 1 in 1000 bits.) The
DFI begins transmitting an RFA signal to the remote endpoint of the port, but
transmission and reception over the E1 line proceed with no interruption at this
end of the connection.
The DFI declares a 10e-3 error-ratio alarm when the frame-alignment error ratio
exceeds 10e-3 for two consecutive four-second periods, and deactivates the
alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for three consecutive foursecond periods.
A frame alignment error, or framing error, is defined as an incorrect bit in one of
the seven framing bits in the TS0 FAS word or an error in bit 2 of the TS0 notword.
Remote Frame
Alarm (RFA)
The DFI is receiving an RFA signal from the remote endpoint (that is, the other
endpoint has an LOS, AIS, LFA, or 10e-3 error-ratio alarm condition, although
there are no problems at this endpoint). The DFI takes no action other than
reporting this alarm.
The DFI reports the RFA condition when the condition persists for approximately
0.6 seconds, and negates the report when the RFA alarm condition has ceased
for approximately 0.2 seconds.
The DFI cannot determine when receiving an RFA alarm whether the channels
are usable—they would be if there were a 10e-3 error-ratio alarm at the other
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-70
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
end—or not usable—they would not be if one of the other conditions were in
effect.
Remote
Multiframe Alarm
(RMA)
The DFI is receiving an RMA signal on an E1 line (that is, the other endpoint has a
TS16 LMA condition, although there are no problems at this endpoint). The DFI
takes no action other than reporting this alarm.
The DFI reports the RMA alarm condition when the condition persists for
approximately 0.6 seconds, and negates the report when the RMA alarm
condition has ceased for approximately 0.2 seconds.
10e-6 Error-Ratio
Alarm
The received signal on the E1 line has a bit error ratio between 10e-3 and 10e-6
over a predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate is less than 1 in 1000
bits but exceeds 1 in 1,000,000 bits.) The DFI takes no action other than reporting
this alarm.
The DFI declares a 10e-6 error-ratio alarm when the frame-alignment error ratio
exceeds 10e-6 for 30 minutes, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold
has been reached for 45 minutes.
Slip Count
The number of times the DS1 has either dropped a frame from the received data
or repeated a frame since the last system inquiry. The DS1 will report the number
of slips autonomously whenever the number of slips reaches 88. The slip count
will be reset (slip count = 0) when the DS1 receives a Slip Count Inquiry message
from the CPU.
The T1 port on the DS1 receives data from a T1 line into a two-frame buffer (by
necessity, at the T1 line rate—8000 frames per second), and empties this buffer
onto the TDM bus (by necessity, at the TDM bus rate). If these rates are not
identical over a significant period of time, then the receive buffer will either
overflow or underflow, resulting in the deletion of a frame or the repeat of a frame.
Each overflow or underflow of the buffer is counted as a single slip.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-71
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
CAT Hardware Errors and Recovery
Actions
The CAT, which is phase-locked to one of the carrier lines attached to the primary
RCF or growth RCF frame, provides system clocks for the TDM bus (either TDM0
or TDM1).
The automatic fault-recovery procedure for a CAT depends upon the fault type
(See Table 11-4).
The CAT monitors both the 8-kHz reference signal and the 8-kHz output clock of
its on-board phase lock loop (PLL) to determine when a slip occurs and to record
the number of slips. A slip is declared when the 8-kHz output clock of the PLL
moves one clock cycle ahead or one clock cycle behind the 8-kHz reference
signal. (Presumably, this happens when the 8-kHz reference signal has a large
degree of jitter, or is out of the frequency range of the PLL.) The CAT declares a
loss of signal error when a specified number of slips occur in any 5-ms period.
The default value upon powerup or after a reset is 10.
The CAT will report a loss of signal error to HEH as soon as it occurs.
HEH sends a slip count inquiry message to the CAT every half hour, to which the
CAT responds with the number of slip conditions it has recorded during the last
half hour. If the number of slip conditions is greater than 44, HEH will send a PPM
inquiry message to the CAT to determine the total parts per million (PPM) counts
detected by the CAT when using the primary or secondary DS1/DFI
synchronization reference. Whether the PPM count is high or low, HEH takes no
recovery action other than to report the PPM count to the ECP.
A high PPM count means that the quality of the reference source (carrier line) is
poor. A further deterioration in the quality of the reference source will cause the
CAT to declare a loss of signal error, at which time HEH will take corrective action.
When a TDM bus is synchronized to local, HEH will attempt to switch to the
primary or secondary reference DS1/DFI every five minutes. The switch will only
proceed if the primary or secondary reference DS1/DFI is now free of alarms and
in the active state.
Call-Processing
Errors and
Recovery Actions
In addition to the hardware faults already described, HEH can detect certain
AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA call-processing related errors.
Diversity Imbalance Errors and Recovery Actions
Diversity imbalance errors are reported autonomously by a Cell Site radio (AMPS,
TDMA, or CDMA) when it perceives widely varying signal strengths in the receive
antennas it is using. The Cell Site will diagnose the radio in question.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-72
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Manual Recovery Actions
The symptoms described in “DS1/DFI and T1 Errors- Detailed Description”
indicate faults on the T1 facility or faults in the generation of the T1 signal by the
remote end. While it is possible that faults in the DS1/DFI can cause these
symptoms, they are more likely to be the result of a fault outside of the DS1/DFI.
In response to an alarming DS1/DFI that is supplying synchronization for the TDM
bus, The Cell Site automatically switches the synchronization reference to another
DS1/DFI, if available. If switching the synchronization reference to another DS1/
DFI results in no further alarms, the DS1/DFI generating the alarm is probably
faulty. In that case, the DS1/DFI generating the alarm should be conditionally
restored. If the problem persists after taking this action, the digital facilities
termination unit at the remote end is probably faulty; it should be conditionally
restored.
A technician can check whether a DS1/DFI is operating properly by running a
diagnostic test on the DS1/DFI. Or, for T1 operation, a line-related problem can be
isolated to either the Cell Site equipment side of the channel service unit (CSU) or
the T1 facility side of the CSU by putting the CSU in loopback. If the problem goes
away, the T1 facility is at fault. The DS1/DFI port that is looped back should not be
supplying system synchronization at the time it is looped.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-73
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Table 11-4.
CAT Errors and Recovery Actions
Fault Type
Description
Automatic Recovery Action
CAT insane*
CAT-to-CPU communication
broken
If mate is out-of-service, HEH takes
no action other than to
unconditionally remove the active
CAT; at that point, both CATs would
be out-of-service.
Assuming mate is in standby, HEH
conditionally restores the active CAT
to standby, which spawns the
following actions:
1. A switch request that sets
the appropriate control bit
in the NCI control register;
NCI uses TDMCKSEL control line to move active CAT
to standby and mate CAT
to active state.
2. A remove request that
moves standby CAT to outof-service state.
3. A diagnose request that
diagnoses out-of-service
CAT; if successful, results
in CAT being restored to
standby state; if not
successful, results in CAT
remaining in out-of-service
state.
CAT hardware failure
Hardware failures include parts
per million (PPM) failure, slip
detector failure, slip in local,
local reference failure, SD0
failure, and SD1 failure.
HEH takes same recovery action as in
case of “CAT insane” condition.
Loss of Signal
Excessive number of slip
conditions (10 or more slips
during any 5-ms period)
HEH switches synchronization
reference to another DS1/ DFI if
available; otherwise, HEH switches to
CAT local source.
* The assumption here is that the active CAT is insane. If, in fact, the standby CAT is insane, HEH
will conditionally restore the standby CAT to standby—no switching of CAT units will occur.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-74
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Or, for E1 operation, assuming that the associated customer-provided network
termination unit (NTU) can be put into loopback, a line-related problem can be
isolated to either the Cell Site equipment side of the NTU or the E1 facility side of
the NTU by putting the NTU in loopback. If the problem goes away, the E1 facility
is at fault. The DFI port that is looped back should not be supplying system
synchronization at the time it is looped.
And finally, for the DFI unit only, if the on-board red and yellow LEDs are lighted,
suspect that the line switches on the DFI are set to the wrong settings.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
11-75
Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
11-76
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12
Routine Maintenance and Radio
Performance Tests
Contents
■
Contents
12-1
■
Maintenance Process
12-3
■
Maintenance Objective
12-3
Maintenance Activities
12-3
Preventive Maintenance
12-3
Routine Maintenance
12-3
Diagnostic Routines
12-4
Visual Inspection
12-4
Maintenance Assumptions
12-4
Routine Maintenance Procedures List
12-5
Fan Screen Cleaning
12-6
Radio Performance Testing
12-7
Radio Test Overview
12-7
Radio Pretest Procedure
12-7
Cable Loss Measurement
12-9
Power Measurement
12-12
Voice 1004 Hz Deviation Measurement
12-13
Post Test Procedure
12-15
Transmitter Output Power Verification
12-16
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-1
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Transmitter Output Power Adjustment
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-16
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Maintenance Process
The maintenance process consists of those activities designed to minimize the
effects of any failure on system performance and to provide the operations
personnel with the information and tools to locate and repair troubles rapidly.
Operators are provided with the necessary information, such as fault and status
information, and the control capability to monitor the system performance and
perform the maintenance functions required to meet system reliability.
The Cell Site is responsible for fault recognition, fault analysis, fault recovery, and
the reporting of faults and hardware maintenance states to the ECP. In those
situations where no automatic recovery action is taken or automatic recovery fails,
it is the responsibility of the technician to perform manual recovery procedures
from the ECP.
Maintenance
Objective
Maintenance
Activities
Preventive
Maintenance
The objective of the maintenance process is to:
■
Avoid unnecessary system initializations
■
Avoid unnecessary manual diagnostics
■
Minimize site visits
■
Maximize system availability.
Maintenance activities fall into one of three categories:
■
Preventive maintenance
■
Corrective maintenance
■
Controlled maintenance.
Preventive maintenance consists of those activities performed at regular intervals
that are designed to identify as soon as possible, potential failure conditions and/
or equipment failures. The goal of preventive maintenance is to maintain normal
system operations and to prevent loss of service. That goal is achieved by the use
of software and manual routines.
Software routines include scheduled software diagnostic tests, functional tests,
and audits.
Routine
Maintenance
Cell Site routine maintenance tasks are listed in Equipment Test List (ETL). The
Cell Site ETL divides Cell Site routines into three categories: (1) Radio and
Control Equipment — those routines associated with call processing control and
Radio Frequency (RF) transmission; (2) Power Equipment — those routines
associated with on-line power supplies, auxiliary power equipment, and
monitoring equipment; and (3) Building and Environmental Equipment — those
routines associated with temperature and humidity control, fire and safety,
emergency lighting, and building alarms.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-3
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
The order in which routines are listed on the ETL is not intended to indicate a
sequence for performing routines. Routines are performed at the intervals listed in
the Interval column and as described within the routine procedures. The Lucent
Technologies Practice contains a reference to the procedural information required
to perform the cell site tests.
Diagnostic Routines
Diagnostic routines are run automatically by system software and are run
manually when a unit is suspected of being faulty or when a unit is replaced.
Diagnostic tests are run only on off-line units. Lucent Technologies 401-660-101,
Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions, contains a complete description of
the diagnostic tests.
Visual Inspection
Visual inspections at the Cell Site should be made on a bimonthly basis. Typical
visual indications to look for are listed below:
Maintenance
Assumptions
■
Alarm lamp indication
■
Smoke
■
Broken cables
■
Blown fuses
■
Overheating
■
Out-of-range temperature and humidity.
It is assumed that the technician is familiar with the following or that such
conditions are otherwise met:
1.
Wrist grounding straps must always be attached before working on any
component or handling the Circuit Packs (CPs). This is to prevent or reduce
electrostatic discharge that may damage or destroy circuit packs containing
integrated circuits.
2.
Powering down the failing unit (when required), reseating CPs, powering up
the unit, and repeating diagnostics when an initial STF message is
received to verify the corrective action.
3.
Replacing one CP at a time when several are suspected, then replacing the
CP, and repeating the diagnostics.
4.
Handling CPs by the edges and the faceplates to avoid damaging contacts
and deforming components.
5.
Operations of the terminal to include mode changing, page manipulation,
and message conventions.
6.
Tagging faulty CPs with office location, mounting location, diagnostic phase
and test that failed, and date removed.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
7.
All test equipment is known to be functioning properly.
8.
A replacement unit or CP is known to be good.
9.
Burned out lamps or Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are replaced without
instruction.
10.
Routine
Maintenance
Procedures List
Audible alarms are retired without instruction.
Table 12-1 provides a list of the Routine Maintenance Procedures for the Series II
cell.
Table 12-1.
Routine Maintenance Procedures
Performance Source
Interval
Document
Routine Maintenance Procedure
RADIO/CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Clean Power Amplifier Cooling
6 mo.
401-201-500
Perform Setup Radio Performance Measurements
12 mo.
401-660-100
Perform Voice Radio Performance Measurements
12 mo.
401-660-100
Performance Measurements
Check Reference Generator Frequency
6 mo.
POWER AND BATTERY PLANT EQUIPMENT
STORAGE BATTERY
Check Float Level
1 mo.
157-629-701
Check Electrolyte Level
1 mo.
157-629-701
Check Cell Voltage
3 mo.
157-629-701
Check Specific Gravity
6 mo.
157-629-701
Check Float Voltage Alarm
12 mo.
167-609-302
Check Fuse Alarms
12 mo.
167-609-302
Check High- and Low-Voltage Alarms
12 mo.
169-652-305
Check Rectifier Failure Alarm
12 mo.
169-652-305
Check High- and Low-Voltage Alarms
12 mo.
169-609-311
Check Rectifier Failure Alarm
12 mo.
169-609-311
1 wk.
Local procedure
150B BATTERY POWER PLANT
RECTIFIER (MOD 1)
RECTIFIER (MOD II)
BUILDING AND ENVIRONMENTAL EQUIPMENT
Air Conditioning Check
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-5
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-1.
Routine Maintenance Procedures (Contd)
Routine Maintenance Procedure
Tower Light Check
1 wk.
Local procedure
Humidifier Check
1 wk.
Local procedure
Dehumidifier Check
1 mo.
Local procedure
Emergency Lighting Check
1 mo.
Local procedure
Exhaust Fan Check
1 mo.
Local procedure
Fire and Safety Equipment Check
1 mo.
Local procedure
Air Dryer Inspection
6 mo.
Local procedure
Dust Cell Site Equipment Check
6 mo.
Local procedure
Fire Alarm Sensor Cleaning
6 mo.
Local procedure
Peripheral Alarms: Door, Fire, AC, Heat Check
6 mo.
Local procedure
Smoke Alarm Check
6 mo.
Local procedure
12 mo.
Local procedure
Heaters Check
Fan Screen
Cleaning
Fan screens require checking/cleaning monthly. Screens should be vacuumed
clean of dirt and cleaned with soap/water to remove any buildup of dirt.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-6
Performance Source
Interval
Document
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Radio Performance Testing
Radio performance testing should be done annually and whenever any
component of a transmit path is changed or altered (See Figure 12-1). The
procedures for doing radio performance testing are given below.
Radio Test
Overview
This procedure describes radio performance tests for power, frequency, and
frequency deviation tests made on the Radio Channel Unit (RCU). This procedure
applies to both setup and Voice RCUs (V-RCUs). These tests are designed to be
run after an RCU is (1) initially installed and (2) when any component of the
transmit path is changed or altered.
At the time of initial installation, the Preamplifier and the RCU associated with
each Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) are adjusted and power level measurements
are made to determine the Effective Radiated Power (ERP) from each LAC. All
performance measurements (power, frequency, and deviation) are made at
connector J3 (Incident Port) on the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch panel. All of
these measurements are recorded in the Cell Site Log to be used as a reference
for these tests and other RCU measurements.
The value of ERP, input to the transmit (TX) antenna, and the power at J3 on the
RTU switch panel should be the same for all RCUs connected to the same LAC.
The maximum allowable ERP is 500 watts per channel.
These performance tests require a Cell Site to Mobile Switching Center (MSC)
data link, the use of a data terminal keyboard, the use of an IFR FM/AM 1500
Communications Service Monitor (CSM) or equivalent, and test cables/adapters.
Radio performance measurements are made in the following order: RCU
Frequency, RCU Effective Radiated Power, RCU Frequency deviation due to 1004
Hz modulation (voice), RCU Frequency due to Supervisory Auditory Tone (SAT),
and RCU Frequency deviation due to 10 kHz (data). Some steps require that input
messages be entered. For each input message, there is a corresponding output
message response. If an interpretation of a message is needed, refer to the Cell
Site Input/Output (I/O) Manual.
Radio Pretest
Procedure
The power level measurements made at J3 on the RTU switch panel and recorded
in the Cell Site log at the time of initial installation are used as a reference for
these performance tests. A portion of the power output from each LAC is fed from
its directional coupler to the RTU switch panel (J3). Therefore, the power level at
J3 is a function of the ERP from any RCU connected to the LAC. That is, all RCUs
connected to a given LAC are adjusted to give the same value at J3. When an
RCU is replaced, the new RCU output is adjusted to give the same value recorded
NOTE:
Run a diagnostic test on the Voice Radio Channel Unit (V-RCU) before
running this test. Perform the following:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-7
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter RMV:CELL a,RA b
Where: a = Cell Site number (1-222)
b = RCU number (0-191)
Enter DGN:CELL a,RA b
Response: ATP and then ALL TEST PASS
Interconnection Panel Assembly
(See Note 1 Below)
From Other
RCUs on Shelf
RF OUT
from Other
1:9 Combiners
"A"
Ports
A1 thru
A12
Tx
Total RF OUT
from Frame
To
Linear
Amplifier
Frame
(Sheet 2)
SET UP
RF OUT
J11
J10
AT&T
Tx SIG
MON.
J9
J8
J7
J6
J5
-.3 to -.6 dB
-.3 to -1.2 dB
Cable
Loss
J4
From Other
1:9 Combiners
Cable
Loss
J1
Tx SIG MON
1:9
Combiner
BBP-1
(-10.5
.5 dB Loss)
ouped in groups of four and the RF outputs from each group are wired to an input "A" port on the
s fixed and is not an option. The way each output "A" port cable (A16, A18, A20) is connected to the
logged on a Reference Chart at installation - See Reference Chart, Sheet 3. For Release 4.0 OMNI
ble. Release 4.1 makes available a 6-Sector Configuration. The sequence in which each Radio
wn in Figure 2-6.
Figure 12-1. Voice Channel Test Paths
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
Transmit
Combiner
BBN2
.5 dB Loss)
(-16
12-8
J3
"A"
Ports
A16, A18, A20
August 2000
Transmit
Monitoring
Jacks
Adjustments require small screwdriver
(Xcelite RS3322 or equivalent)
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
biner PDO
3 dB Loss)
* Preamplifier
Unit PAO
(+35 5 dB Gain)
Antenna Interface Frame
(See Note 2 Below)
Radio Test Unit Switch Panel
Forward Test Port
Reflected Test Port
J1
To Other 3:1 Combiners As Required
-.4 to -1.1 dB
J10
J15
J16
J30
J35
J36
J50
J55
J56
J2
J3
J4
Transmit
Control Interface
J26
J25
J20
J46
J45
J40
J66
J65
J60
Gain ADJ
Directional
Coupler
-5 dB
From Other
Transmit
Filter Panels
Cable
Loss
Linear Amplifier Unit - LAU0
J41660CA-1
rames and Antenna Interface Frames
n Antenna Configuration and Power Output.
me can have up to four Linear Amplifier
ts - 240 watts per Linear Amplifier Circuits.
Frame can have up to three Linear
f 720 watts. This gives a total RF output
-40 dB
Transmit Filter Panel
-50 dB
Cable
Loss
Transmit Filter
For each Linear Amplifier unit there is one preamplifier and one 3:1 Combiner.
A maximum of seven antennas may be driven per cell site-OMNI,
3-Sector, or some combination of OMNI and 3-Sector.
The Antenna Interface Frame may use up to seven Transmit Filter
Panels. Duplex Panels may be used.
Figure 12-2. Voice Channel Test Paths
Cable Loss
Measurement
1.
Configure the IFR FM/AM 1500 Communications Service Monitor (CSM)
as shown in Table 12-2 and allow 30 minutes warm-up:
Table 12-2.
Configuration of IFR FM/AM 1500 CSM
ATTENUATOR
0 dB
DISPLAY
ANALY
ANALY DISPR
1M
DUPLEX/SIMPLEX
DUPLEX
GEN/REC
GEN
AVE PEAK/PEAK
AVG PEAK
MODULATION
FM3
DEV-PWR
20 kHz
DEV-VERT
5 kHz/DIV
dB/DIV
10
GEN/LOCK
FULLY CCW
INT TONE/RCVR
RCVR
VOLUME
AS DESIRED
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-9
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-2.
Configuration of IFR FM/AM 1500 CSM (Contd)
ATTENUATOR
0 dB
SQUELCH
FULLY CCW
FREQ ERROR
RF OUTPUT LEVEL
1 kHz
−40 dBm
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
3.
Press RF on the keyboard. Enter 8803200, press Enter on the keyboard.
Confirm 880.3200 MHz is displayed.
NOTE:
For non-wireline company, use 875.0100 MHz.
4.
Connect a reference cable from the DUPLEX OUTPUT jack to the
ANTENNA jack.
5.
The signal should appear near the -40 graticule level. Set the dB/DIV
switch to 1 and use the VERT POS control to adjust the reference level so
that the peak of the signal is at the -40 graticule level. (After this is done, do
not adjust the VERT POS control for any reason while performing the
alignment and measurements, otherwise inaccuracies occur.)
6.
Disconnect the reference cable from the ANTENNA jack.
7.
Connect the test cable and any associated adapters whose loss is to be
measured to the ANTENNA jack. Connect the reference cable and the test
cable to be measured together using a BNC jack/BNC jack adapter.
8.
Read the Radio Frequency (RF) output level at the Cathode Ray Tube
(CRT). The loss of the test cable is the difference between the measured
output level and the reference level (measured output level minus -40
dBm). Retain this value for subsequent use.
9.
In the Cell Site Log or in translations, look up the Radio Channel Unit
(RCU) number (0 to 199), assigned channel number, and assigned
frequency of the RCU to be tested.
10.
If test is to be run from the Cell Site, establish a Cell Site/MSC data link
(see procedure covering Cell Site to Mobile Switching Center (MSC) data
link).
11.
Configure the IFR FM/AM 1500 Communications Service Monitor (CSM)
as follows:
12.
Remove the 50-ohm terminator from J3 (Incident Port) on the Radio Test
Unit (RTU) switch panel on the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-3.
Configuration of IFR FM/AM 1500 CDM
CONTROL
SET TO
DISPLAY
METER
ATTENUATOR
40 dB
AVG PEAK/PEAK
PEAK
MODULATION
FM3
DEV-PWR
15
FREQ ERROR
1 kHz
ANALY DISPR
10 kHz/DIV
DEV-VERT
5 kHz/DEV
dB/DIV
10
GEN/LOCK
LOCK
INT TONE/RCVR
RCVR
VOLUME
As desired
SQUELCH
FULLY CCW
GEN/REC
REC
DUPLEX/SIMPLEX
SIMPLEX
13.
Connect the test cable with a known loss to J3 (Incident Port) on the RTU
switch panel on the AIF, using a BNC jack/SMA plug adapter. Connect the
other end of the test cable to Communications Service Monitor (CSM) as
follows:
14.
Tests performed are measurements of transmitter frequency, power output,
and frequency deviation on the Voice Radio Channel Units (V-RCUs).
Frequency deviation measurements are made for voice, Supervisory Audio
Tone (SAT), and data transmissions.
15.
All measurements are made at J3 on the RTU switch panel.
16.
Effective Radiated Power (ERP) is calculated for the Radio Channel Unit
(RCU) under test as a function of the power level at J3.
17.
All measurements taken are recorded along with the serial number and
calibration date of the test equipment used to perform the tests.
18.
The value of the power input to the antenna (input from the foam jumper
cable) should be the same for all RCUs connected to the same antenna.
19.
The maximum allowable Federal Communications Commission's (FCC's)
ERP is 500 watts per channel.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-11
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
20.
On the CSM, press RF and enter the assigned Radio Frequency (RF) of
the RCU under test.
21.
Frequency Measurement
22.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; START
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Where: a = Cell Site number (1-222)
n = RCU number (0-191)
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; CONFIG 150
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; XMITC 300
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; VRADPC 357
Response: ALL WENT WELL
23.
Read the frequency error on the Cathode Ray Tube's (CRT's)
Communications Service Monitor (CSM) display.
NOTE:
If frequency error is small, increase resolution by changing FRQ ERROR to
300 or 100 Hz scale.
24.
Is measured frequency less than ± 0.80 kHz?
If YES, then record in Cell Site Log and continue to Step 25 for power
measurement. If No, then continue to Step 24.
Power
Measurement
25.
Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure.
26.
At Communications Service Monitor (CSM), set DISPLAY to ANALY.
27.
Read RF level (to the nearest dB) from the center of the Cathode Ray Tube
(CRT) Communications Service Monitor (CSM) display.
28.
Calculate the power level at J3 (Incident Port) by adding the Test Cable
Loss (in dB) to the measured power level above.
29.
The level obtained in Step 27 should equal the level recorded in the Cell
Site Log (± x dBm) for the LAC associated with the Radio Channel Unit
(RCU) under test. Adjust the RCU output until the correct level is obtained.
30.
If the RCU under test is an existing RCU or the replacement for an existing
RCU, the values recorded in columns 1 through 7 of the Cell Site log are
valid.
31.
If the RCU is being put into service for the first time, the values to be
recorded in columns 1 through 7 are the same as other RCUs on the same
Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC).
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
NOTE:
If the RCU under test is a setup RCU, go to Step 48.
Voice 1004 Hz
Deviation
Measurement
32.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 106
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 101
Response: ALL WENT WELL
33.
At the Communications Service Monitor (CSM) display set DISPLAY to
METER, MODULATION to FM2, and DEV to 6 kHz.
34.
From the Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) display of the Communications Service
Monitor (CSM), read DEV in kHz
35.
Is measured peak frequency deviation within the limits shown in Table
12-4?
Table 12-4.
Peak Frequency Deviation Limits
Network
Transmission
Peak Frequency Deviation (kHz)
Level –TX (dB)*
Nominal
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
+3
5.47
4.99
5.95
+2
5.16
4.71
5.61
+1
4.87
4.45
5.32
4.60
4.20
5.00
–1
4.34
3.96
4.72
–2
4.10
3.74
4.46
–3
3.87
3.53
4.21
–4
3.65
3.33
3.97
–5
3.45
3.15
3.75
–6
3.26
2.98
3.54
–7
3.07
2.80
3.34
–8
2.90
2.65
3.15
–9
2.74
2.50
2.98
–10
2.59
2.36
2.82
–11
2.44
2.23
2.65
–12
2.31
2.11
2.51
–13
2.18
1.99
2.37
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-13
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-4.
Peak Frequency Deviation Limits (Contd)
Network
Transmission
Peak Frequency Deviation (kHz)
–14
2.05
1.87
2.23
–15
1.94
1.77
2.11
.*The Network Transmission Level - TX 9 (dB) is
the value located in the Cell Site data base, cell dB,
"Network Transmission Level - TX" in the RC/V
(Recent Change & Verify) subsystem.
If YES, then record in Cell Site Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION
DUE TO 1004 Hz MODULATION AT -16 dBm and do Step 36. If NO, then
continue to Step 35.
36.
Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure.
37.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 102
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 100
Response: ALL WENT WELL
38.
At CSM, set DEV-PWR to 20 kHz.
39.
From Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) of CSM, read DEV in kHz.
40.
Is measured peak frequency deviation less than or equal to the 12 kHz
maximum limit?
If YES, then record in Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION DUE TO
1004 Hz MODULATION AT 0 dBm and do Step 41. If NO, then continue to
Step 40.
41.
Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure.
42.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 102
Response: ALL WENT WELL
43.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 112
Response: ALL WENT WELL
44.
At CSM, set DEV-PWR to 6 kHz.
45.
From CRT of CSM, read DEV in kHz.
46.
Is measured peak frequency deviation within the 1.75 to 2.25 kHz limits?
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
If YES, then record in Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION DUE TO
SAT and do Step 47. If NO, then continue to Step 46.
47.
Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure.
48.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 113
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Data 10 kHz Deviation Measurement
49.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; ECODC 201
Response: ALL WENT WELL
50.
At the Communications Service Monitor (CSM), set DEV/PWR to 20 kHz
and MODULATION to FM3.
51.
Is measured peak frequency deviation within 7.0 to 9.0 kHz limits?
If YES, then record in Cell Site Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION
DUE TO 10 kHz and do Step 52. If NO, then continue to Step 51.
52.
Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure.
53.
Remove transmission test set from J3.
54.
At data terminal keyboard:
Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; ECODC 202
Response: ALL WENT WELL
Enter STOP:DGN;CELL a,RA n
Response: OOS, MANUAL, RMVD
Enter RST:CELL a,RA n
NOTE:
This procedure must be repeated for each voice channel to be tested.
55.
Is this the last voice channel to be tested?
If YES, then continue to Step 55. If NO, then go to Pretest.
Post Test
Procedure
56.
In Cell Site Log, record test equipment model, serial number, and
calibration date. Record Federal Communications Commission (FCC) radio
telephone license number, its expiration date, the date of test, and then
sign the Log.
57.
Remove and store all test equipment and test cables.
58.
STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-15
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
NOTE:
Output power is measured at jack J3 on the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch
panel.
Transmitter
Output Power
Verification
1.
Verify that the cell's Radio Channel Unit (RCU) equipage per transmitter
[Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC)] agrees with the Cell Site Test Record
Sheets. Update the sheets with the added Digital Radio Units (DRUs).
2.
Specify and verify that the DRU output power is different from the RCU.
NOTE:
When determining the maximum number of radios that are assigned to a
LAC, each DRU should be counted as 1.5 units, and each RCU should be
counted as 1.0 units. Ensure that the units added to each transmitter (LAC)
does not exceed the LAC's maximum allowable output power.
Transmitter
Output Power
Adjustment
1.
If the Cell Site Test Record Sheet is inaccurate or missing, verify that the
transmitter's (LAC) maximum allowable output power is not exceeded.
2.
1. Connect a test cable of known loss between the CSTS RF IN/OUT jack
and jack J3 on the RTU switch panel.
NOTE:
The CSTS is operated in the manual mode during this subsection.
3.
On the CSTS at the Lucent TESTS menu, press EXIT to set the CSTS to
the manual mode. While in the manual mode, perform the following
procedures:
a.
Press RESET.
b.
Select and punch TO SCREEN - SPEC ANL.
c.
Select and punch CENTER FREQ.
d.
Enter 882 via the DATA keys, and press ENTER.
e.
Select and punch REF LEVEL.
f.
Enter -10 via the DATA keys, and press ENTER.
g.
Select and punch SPAN.
h.
Enter 30 via the DATA keys, and press ENTER.
i.
Select and punch CONTROLS - MAIN.
j.
Under CHOICES, select and punch AUXILIARY.
k.
Select and punch CONTROLS - NO PK/AVG.
l.
Under CHOICES, select and punch AVG 10.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
4.
5.
Enter the value of the RF IN/OUT test cable's loss into the CSTS as
follows:
a.
Press SHIFT.
b.
Press DUPLEX.
c.
Select and punch CONFIGURE - RF LEVEL OFFSET. (ON should
be underscored.)
d.
Select and punch CONFIGURE - RF IN/OUT.
e.
Enter the value of the test cable's loss (as a negative number) via
the DATA keys, and press ENTER.
f.
Press PREV.
Choose an AMPS RCU that is assigned to the same transmitter (LAC) as
that of the DRU under test.
NOTE:
The RCU is used as a reference radio for the DRU under test. Choose an
RCU that is set to the same full power level value (0 VRAL) to that in which
the DRU under test will be adjusted.
6.
Configure the reference RCU under test for full power output as follows:
NOTE:
After each MSC command input, wait for the MSC response message: ALL
WENT WELL.
RMV:CELL x,RA y;UCL (where x=cell number; y=radio number)
CFR:CELL x,RA y;START
CFR:CELL x,RA y;CONFIG 150
CFR:CELL x,RA y;XMITC 300
CFR:CELL x,RA y;VRADPC 357
7.
Configure the RCU under test for full power output as follows: After each
MSC command input, wait for the MSC response message: ALL WENT
WELL.
RMV:CELL x,RA y;UCL (where x=cell number; y=radio number)
CFR:CELL x,RA y;START
CFR:CELL x,RA y;CONFIG 150
CFR:CELL x,RA y;XMITC 300
CFR:CELL x,RA y;VRADPC 357
8.
Ensure that the DRU under test's AUTO/OFF switch is set to AUTO.
9.
Identify the reference RCU and the DRU under test on the CSTS's display.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-17
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
NOTE:
If multiple radios are in service, their signals will also be present on the
display. Momentarily set the RCU's and/or DRU's AUTO/OFF switch to OFF
to help to identify the signals.
10.
11.
On the Lucent CSTS, perform the following procedures:
a.
Select and punch CONTROLS - AUXILIARY.
b.
Under CHOICES, select and punch MARKER.
c.
Select and punch MARKER TO - NEXT PEAK multiple times until
the display's marker is positioned on the peak of the reference
RCU's signal.
d.
Record the MARKER LVL (dbm) as displayed on the CSTS's display
(upper right corner).
e.
Select and punch MARKER TO - NEXT PEAK multiple times until
the display's marker is positioned on the peak of the DRU under
test's signal.
Slowly adjust the potentiometer on the front of the DRU under test until the
DRU's signal level matches the reference RCU's level as displayed by
MARKER LVL.
NOTE:
Because of the video averaging effect, the CSTS's response to adjusting
the DRU's level is delayed. To improve the response, press MEAS RESET
during the measurement.
12.
Set the DRU under test's AUTO/OFF switch to OFF.
13.
Repeat Step 6 through Step 12 under the Transmitter Output Power
Adjustment section for all other newly installed DRUs that are assigned to
the transmitter (LAC) under test.
14.
Terminate the reference RCU as follows:
STOP:CFR;CELL X,RA Y (where X=cell number; Y=radio number)
RST:CELL X,RA Y;UCL
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel
Number
Channel Number Center Frequencies
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
870.030
825.030
44
871.320
826.320
870.060
825.060
45
871.350
826.350
870.090
825.090
46
871.380
826.380
870.120
825.120
47
871.410
826.410
870.150
825.150
48
871.440
826.440
870.180
825.180
49
871.470
826.470
870.210
825.210
50
871.500
826.500
870.240
825.240
51
871.530
826.530
870.270
825.270
52
871.560
826.560
10
870.300
825.300
53
871.590
826.590
11
870.330
825.330
54
871.620
826.620
12
870.360
825.360
55
871.650
826.650
13
870.390
825.390
56
871.680
826.680
14
870.420
825.420
57
871.710
826.710
15
870.450
825.450
58
871.740
826.740
16
870.480
825.480
59
871.770
826.770
17
870.510
825.510
60
871.800
826.800
18
870.540
825.540
61
871.830
826.830
19
870.570
825.570
62
871.860
826.860
20
870.600
825.600
63
871.890
826.890
21
870.630
825.630
64
871.920
826.920
22
870.660
825.660
65
871.950
826.950
23
870.690
825.690
66
871.980
826.980
24
870.720
825.720
67
872.010
827.010
25
870.750
825.750
68
872.040
827.040
26
870.780
825.780
69
872.070
827.070
27
870.810
825.810
70
872.100
827.100
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-19
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
28
870.840
825.840
71
872.130
827.130
29
870.870
825.870
72
872.160
827.160
30
870.900
825.900
73
872.190
827.190
31
870.930
825.930
74
872.220
827.220
32
870.960
825.960
75
872.250
827.250
33
870.990
825.990
76
872.280
827.280
34
871.020
826.020
77
872.310
827.310
35
871.050
826.050
78
872.340
827.340
36
871.080
826.080
79
872.370
827.370
37
871.110
826.110
80
872.400
827.400
38
871.140
826.140
81
872.430
827.430
39
871.170
826.170
82
872.460
827.460
40
871.200
826.200
83
872.490
827.490
41
871.230
826.230
84
872.520
827.520
42
871.260
826.260
85
872.550
827.550
43
871.290
826.290
86
872.580
827.580
87
872.610
827.610
129
873.870
828.870
88
872.640
827.640
130
873.900
828.900
89
872.670
827.670
131
873.930
828.930
90
872.700
827.700
132
873.960
828.960
91
872.730
827.730
133
873.990
828.990
92
872.760
827.760
134
874.020
829.020
93
872.790
827.790
135
874.050
829.050
94
872.820
827.820
136
874.080
829.080
95
872.850
827.850
137
874.110
829.110
96
872.880
827.880
138
874.140
829.140
97
872.910
827.910
139
874.170
829.170
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel
Number
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
98
872.940
827.940
140
874.200
829.200
99
872.970
827.970
141
874.230
829.230
100
873.000
828.000
142
874.260
829.260
101
873.030
828.030
143
874.290
829.290
102
873.060
828.060
144
874.320
829.320
103
873.090
828.090
145
874.350
829.350
104
873.120
828.120
146
874.380
829.380
105
873.150
828.150
147
874.410
829.410
106
873.180
828.180
148
874.440
829.440
107
873.210
828.210
149
874.470
829.470
108
873.240
828.240
150
874.500
829.500
109
873.270
828.270
151
874.530
829.530
110
873.300
828.300
152
874.560
829.560
111
873.330
828.330
153
874.590
829.590
112
873.360
828.360
154
874.620
829.620
113
873.390
828.390
155
874.650
829.650
114
873.420
828.420
156
874.680
829.680
115
873.450
828.450
157
874.710
829.710
116
873.480
628.480
158
874.740
829.740
117
873.510
828.510
159
874.770
829.770
118
873.540
828.540
160
874.800
829.800
119
873.570
828.570
161
874.830
829.830
120
873.600
828.600
162
874.860
829.860
121
873.630
828.630
163
874.890
829.890
122
873.660
828.660
164
874.920
829.920
123
873.690
828.690
165
874.950
829.950
124
873.720
828.720
166
874.980
829.980
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-21
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
125
873.750
828.750
167
875.010
830.010
126
873.780
828.780
168
875.040
830.040
127
873.810
828.810
169
875.070
830.070
128
873.840
828.640
170
875.100
830.100
171
875.130
830.130
214
876.420
831.420
172
875.160
830.160
215
876.450
831.450
173
875.190
830.190
216
876.480
831.480
174
875.220
830.220
217
876.510
831.510
175
875.250
830.250
218
876.540
831.540
176
875.280
830.280
219
876.570
831.570
177
875.310
830.310
220
876.600
831.600
178
875.340
830.340
221
876.630
831.630
179
875.370
830.370
222
876.660
831.660
180
875.400
830.400
223
876.690
831.690
181
875.430
830.430
224
876.720
831.720
182
875.460
830.460
225
876.750
831.750
183
875.490
830.490
226
876.780
831.780
184
875.520
830.520
227
876.810
831.810
185
875.550
830.550
228
876.840
831.840
186
875.580
830.580
229
876.870
831.870
187
875.610
830.610
230
876.900
831.900
188
875.640
830.640
231
876.930
831.930
189
875.670
830.670
232
876.960
831.960
190
875.700
830.700
233
876.990
831.990
191
875.730
830.730
234
877.020
832.020
192
875.760
830.760
235
877.050
832.050
193
875.790
830.790
236
877.080
832.080
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
194
875.820
830.820
237
877.110
832.110
195
875.850
830.850
238
877.140
832.140
196
875.880
830.880
239
877.170
832.170
197
875.910
830.910
240
877.200
832.200
198
875.940
830.940
241
877.230
832.230
199
875.970
830.970
242
877.260
832.260
200
876.000
831.000
243
877.290
832.290
201
876.030
831.030
244
877.320
832.320
202
876.060
831.060
245
877.350
832.350
203
876.090
831.090
246
877.380
832.380
204
876.120
831.120
247
877.410
832.410
205
876.150
831.150
248
877.440
832.440
206
876.180
831.180
249
877.470
832.470
207
876.210
831.210
250
877.500
832.500
208
876.240
831.240
251
877.530
832.530
209
876.270
831.270
252
877.560
832.560
210
876.300
831.300
253
877.590
832.590
211
876.330
831.330
254
877.620
832.620
212
876.360
831.360
255
877.650
832.650
213
876.390
831.390
256
877.680
832.680
257
877.710
832.710
300
879.000
834.000
258
877.740
832.740
301
879.030
834.030
259
877.770
832.770
302
879.060
834.060
260
877.800
832.800
303
879.090
834.090
261
877.830
832.830
304
879.120
834.120
262
877.860
832.860
305
879.150
834.150
263
877.890
832.890
306
879.180
834.180
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-23
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
264
877.920
832.920
307
879.210
834.210
265
877.950
832.950
308
879.240
834.240
266
877.980
832.980
309
879.270
834.270
267
878.010
833.010
310
879.300
834.300
268
878.040
833.040
311
879.330
834.330
269
878.070
833.070
312
879.360
834.360
270
878.100
833.100
313
879.390
834.390
271
878.130
833.130
314
879.420
834.420
272
878.160
833.160
315
879.450
834.450
273
878.190
833.190
316
879.480
834.480
274
878.220
833.220
317
879.510
834.510
275
878.250
833.250
318
879.540
834.540
276
878.280
833.280
319
879.570
834.570
277
878.310
833.310
320
879.600
834.600
278
878.340
833.340
321
879.630
834.630
279
878.370
833.370
322
879.660
834.660
280
878.400
833.400
323
879.690
834.690
281
878.430
833.430
324
879.720
834.720
282
878.460
833.460
325
879.750
834.750
283
878.490
833.490
326
879.780
834.780
284
878.520
833.520
327
879.810
834.810
285
878.550
833.550
328
879.840
834.840
286
878.580
833.580
329
879.870
834.870
287
878.610
833.610
330
879.900
834.900
288
878.640
833.640
331
879.930
834.930
289
878.670
833.670
332
879.960
834.960
290
878.700
833.700
333
879.990
834.990
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
291
878.730
833.730
334
880.020
835.020
292
878.760
833.760
335
880.050
835.050
293
878.790
833.790
336
880.080
835.080
294
878.820
833.820
337
880.110
835.110
295
878.850
833.850
338
880.140
835.140
296
878.880
833.880
339
880.170
835.170
297
878.910
833.910
340
880.200
835.200
298
878.940
833.940
341
880.230
835.230
299
878.970
833.970
342
880.260
835.260
343
880.290
835.290
385
881.550
836.550
344
880.320
835.320
386
881.580
836.580
345
880.350
835.350
387
881.610
836.610
346
880.380
835.380
388
881.640
836.640
347
880.410
835.410
389
881.670
836.670
348
880.440
835.440
390
881.700
836.700
349
880.470
835.470
391
881.730
836.730
350
880.500
835.500
392
881.760
836.760
351
880.530
835.530
393
881.790
836.790
352
880.560
835.560
394
881.820
836.820
353
880.590
835.590
395
881.850
836.850
354
880.620
835.620
396
881.880
836.880
355
880.650
835.650
397
881.910
836.910
356
880.680
835.660
398
881.940
836.940
357
880.710
835.710
399
881.970
836.970
358
880.740
835.740
400
882.000
837.000
359
880.770
835.770
401
882.030
837.030
360
880.800
835.800
402
882.060
837.060
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-25
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
361
880.830
835.830
403
882.090
837.090
362
880.860
835.860
404
882.120
837.120
363
880.890
835.890
405
882.150
837.150
364
880.920
835.920
406
882.180
837.180
365
880.950
835.950
407
882.210
837.210
366
880.980
835.980
408
882.240
837.240
367
881.010
836.010
409
882.270
837.270
368
881.040
836.040
410
882.300
837.300
369
881.070
836.070
411
882.330
837.330
370
881.100
836.100
412
882.360
837.360
371
881.130
836.130
413
882.390
837.390
372
881.160
836.160
414
882.420
837.420
373
881.190
836.190
415
882.450
837.450
374
881.220
836.220
416
882.480
837.480
375
881.250
836.250
417
882.510
837.510
376
881.280
836.280
418
882.540
837.540
377
881.310
836.310
419
882.570
837.570
378
881.340
836.340
420
882.600
837.600
379
881.370
836.370
421
882.630
837.630
380
881.400
836.400
422
882.660
837.660
381
881.430
836.430
423
882.690
837.690
382
881.460
836.460
424
882.720
837.720
383
881.490
836.490
425
882.750
837.750
384
881.520
836.520
426
882.780
837.780
427
882.810
837.810
469
884.070
839.070
428
882.840
837.840
470
884.100
839.100
429
882.870
837.870
471
884.130
839.130
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-26
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
430
882.900
837.900
472
884.160
839.160
431
882.930
837.930
473
884.190
839.190
432
882.960
837.960
474
884.220
839.220
433
882.990
837.990
475
884.250
839.250
434
883.020
837.020
476
884.280
839.280
435
883.050
838.050
477
884.310
839.310
436
883.080
838.080
478
884.340
839.340
437
883.110
838.110
479
884.370
839.370
438
883.140
838.140
480
884.400
839.400
439
883.170
838.170
481
884.430
839.430
440
883.200
838.200
482
884.460
839.460
441
883.230
838.230
483
884.490
839.490
442
883.260
838.260
484
884.520
839.520
443
883.290
838.290
485
884.550
839.550
444
883.320
838.320
486
884.580
839.580
445
883.350
838.350
487
884.610
839.610
446
883.380
838.380
488
884.640
839.640
447
883.410
838.410
489
884.670
839.670
448
883.440
838.440
490
884.700
839.700
449
883.470
838.470
491
884.730
839.730
450
883.500
838.500
492
884.760
839.760
451
883.530
838.530
493
884.790
839.790
452
883.560
838.560
494
884.029
839.820
453
883.590
838.590
495
884.850
839.850
454
883.620
838.620
496
884.880
839.880
455
883.650
838.650
497
884.910
839.910
456
883.680
838.680
498
884.940
839.940
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-27
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
457
883.710
838.710
499
884.910
839.970
458
883.740
838.740
500
885.300
840.000
459
883.770
838.770
501
885.030
840.030
460
883.800
838.800
502
885.060
840.060
461
883.830
838.830
503
885.090
840.090
462
883.860
838.860
504
885.120
840.120
463
883.890
838.890
505
885.150
840.150
464
883.920
838.920
506
885.180
840.180
465
883.950
838.950
507
885.210
840.210
466
883.980
838.980
508
885.240
840.240
467
884.010
839.010
509
885.270
840.270
468
864.040
839.040
510
885.300
840.300
511
885.330
840.330
553
886.590
841.590
512
885.360
840.360
554
886.620
841.620
513
885.390
840.390
555
886.650
841.650
514
885.420
840.420
556
886.680
841.680
515
885.450
840.450
557
886.710
841.710
516
885.480
840.480
558
886.740
841.740
517
885.510
840.510
559
886.770
841.770
518
885.540
840.540
560
886.800
841.800
519
885.570
840.570
561
886.630
841.830
520
885.600
840.600
562
886.860
841.860
521
885.630
840.630
563
886.890
841.890
522
885.660
840.660
564
886.920
841.920
523
885.690
840.690
565
886.950
841.950
524
685.720
840.720
566
886.980
841.980
525
885.750
840.750
567
887.010
842.010
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-28
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
526
885.780
840.780
568
887.040
842.040
527
885.810
840.810
569
887.070
842.070
528
885.840
840.840
570
887.100
842.100
529
885.870
840.870
571
887.130
842.130
530
885.900
840.900
572
887.160
842.160
531
885.930
840.930
573
887.190
842.190
532
885.960
840.960
574
887.220
842.220
533
885.990
840.990
575
887.250
842.250
534
886.020
841.020
576
887.280
842.280
535
886.050
841.050
577
887.310
842.310
536
886.080
841.080
578
887.340
842.340
537
886.110
841.110
579
887.370
842.370
538
886.140
841.140
580
887.400
842.400
539
886.170
841.170
581
887.430
842.430
540
886.200
841.200
582
887.460
842.460
541
886.230
841.230
583
887.490
842.490
542
886.260
841.260
584
887.520
842.520
543
886.290
841.290
585
887.550
842.550
544
886.320
841.320
586
887.580
842.580
545
886.350
841.350
587
887.610
842.610
546
886.380
841.380
588
887.640
842.640
547
886.410
841.410
589
887.670
842.670
548
886.440
841.440
590
887.700
842.700
549
886.470
841.470
591
887.730
842.730
550
886.500
841.500
592
887.760
842.760
551
886.530
841.530
593
887.790
842.790
552
886.560
841.560
594
887.820
842.820
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-29
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
595
887.850
842.850
636
889.080
844.080
596
887.880
842.880
637
889.110
844.110
597
887.910
842.910
638
889.140
844.140
598
887.940
842.940
639
889.170
844.170
599
887.970
842.970
640
889.200
844.200
600
888.000
843.000
641
889.230
844.230
601
886.030
843.030
642
889.260
844.260
602
888.060
843.060
643
889.290
844.290
603
888.090
843.090
644
889.320
844.320
604
888.120
843.120
645
889.350
844.350
605
888.150
843.150
646
889.380
844.380
606
888.180
843.180
647
889.410
844.410
607
888.210
843.210
648
889.440
844.440
608
888.240
843.240
649
889.470
844.470
609
888.270
843.270
650
889.500
844.500
610
888.300
843.300
651
889.530
844.530
611
888.330
843.330
652
889.560
844.560
612
888.360
843.360
653
889.590
844.590
613
888.390
843.390
654
889.620
844.620
614
888.420
843.420
655
889.650
844.650
615
888.450
843.450
656
889.680
844.680
616
888.480
843.480
657
889.710
844.710
617
888.510
843.510
658
889.740
844.740
618
888.540
843.540
659
889.770
844.770
619
886.570
843.570
660
889.800
844.800
620
888.600
843.600
661
889.830
844.830
621
888.630
843.630
662
869.860
844.860
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-30
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
622
888.660
843.660
663
689.890
844.890
623
886.690
843.690
664
889.920
844.920
624
888.720
843.720
665
889.950
844.950
625
888.750
843.750
666
689.980
844.980
626
888.780
843.780
667
890.010
845.010
627
888.810
843.810
668
890.040
845.040
628
888.840
843.840
669
890.070
845.070
629
888.870
843.870
670
890.100
845.100
630
888.900
843.900
671
890.130
845.130
631
888.930
843.930
672
890.160
845.160
632
888.960
843.960
673
890.190
845.190
633
888.990
843.990
674
890.220
845.220
634
889.020
844.020
675
890.250
845.250
635
889.050
844.050
676
890.280
845.200
677
890.310
845.310
718
891.540
846.540
678
890.340
845.340
719
891.570
846.570
679
890.370
845.370
720
891.600
846.600
680
890.400
845.400
721
891.630
846.630
681
890.430
845.430
722
891.660
846.660
682
890.460
845.460
723
891.690
846.690
683
890.490
845.490
724
891.720
846.720
684
890.520
845.520
725
891.750
846.750
685
890.550
845.550
726
891.780
846.780
686
890.580
845.580
727
891.810
846.810
687
890.610
845.610
728
891.840
846.840
688
890.640
845.640
729
891.870
846.870
689
890.670
845.670
730
891.900
846.900
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-31
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
690
890.700
845.700
731
891.930
846.930
691
890.730
845.730
732
891.960
846.960
692
890.760
845.760
733
891.990
846.990
693
890.790
845.790
734
892.020
847.020
694
890.820
845.820
735
892.050
847.050
695
890.850
845.850
736
892.080
847.080
696
890.680
845.880
737
892.110
847.110
697
890.910
845.910
738
892.140
847.140
698
890.940
845.940
739
892.170
847.170
699
890.970
845.970
740
892.200
847.200
700
891.000
846.000
741
892.230
847.230
701
891.030
848.030
742
892.260
847.260
702
891.060
846.060
743
892.290
847.290
703
891.090
846.090
744
892.320
847.320
704
891.120
846.120
745
892.350
847.350
705
891.150
846.150
746
892.380
847.380
706
891.180
846.180
747
892.410
847.410
707
891.210
846.210
748
892.440
847.440
708
891.240
846.240
749
892.470
847.470
709
891.270
846.270
750
892.500
847.500
710
891.300
846.300
751
892.530
847.530
711
891.330
846.330
752
892.560
847.580
712
891.360
846.360
753
892.590
847.590
713
891.390
846.390
754
892.620
847.620
714
891.420
846.420
755
892.650
847.650
715
891.450
846.450
756
892.680
847.680
716
891.480
846.480
757
892.710
847.710
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-32
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
717
891.510
846.510
758
892.740
847.740
759
892.770
847.770
796
893.860
848.860
760
892.800
847.800
797
893.910
848.910
761
892.830
847.830
798
893.940
848.940
762
892.860
847.860
799
893.970
848.970
763
892.890
847.890
991
869.040
824.040
764
892.920
847.920
992
869.070
824.070
765
892.950
847.950
993
869.100
824.100
766
892.980
847.980
994
869.130
824.130
767
893.010
848.010
995
869.160
824.160
768
893.040
848.040
996
869.190
824.190
769
893.070
848.070
997
869.220
824.220
770
893.100
848.100
998
869.250
824.250
771
893.130
848.130
999
869.280
824.280
772
893.160
848.160
1000
869.310
824.310
773
893.190
848.190
1001
869.340
824.340
774
893.220
848.220
1002
869.370
824.370
775
893.250
848.250
1003
869.400
824.400
776
893.280
848.280
1004
869.430
824.430
777
893.310
848.310
1005
869.460
824.460
778
893.340
848.340
1006
869.490
824.490
779
893.370
848.370
1007
869.520
824.520
780
893.400
848.400
1008
869.550
824.550
781
893.430
848.430
1009
869.580
824.580
782
893.460
848.460
1010
869.610
824.610
783
893.490
848.490
1011
869.640
824.640
784
893.520
848.520
1012
869.670
824.670
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-33
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-5.
Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)
Channel
Number
Center Freq(MHz)
Channel Center Freq (MHz) Cell
Cell Site
Subscriber Number Site
Subscriber
785
893.550
848.550
1013
869.700
824.700
786
893.580
848.580
1014
869.730
824.730
787
893.610
848.610
1015
869.760
824.760
788
893.640
848.640
1016
869.790
824.790
789
893.670
848.670
1017
869.820
824.820
790
893.700
848.700
1018
869.850
824.850
791
893.730
848.730
1019
869.880
824.880
792
893.760
848.760
1020
869.910
824.910
793
893.790
848.790
1021
869.940
824.940
794
893.820
848.820
1022
869.970
824.970
795
893.850
848.850
1023
870.000
825.000
Table 12-6.
Watts-to-dBm
Watts dBm Watts
dBm Watts
dBm Watts dBm
0.50
27.0 1.32
31.2 3.55
35.5 9.77
39.9
0.51
27.1 1.35
31.3 3.63
35.6 10.0
40.0
0.52
27.2 1.38
31.4 3.72
35.7 10.2
40.1
0.54
27.3 1.41
31.5 3.80
35.8 10.4
40.2
0.55
27.4 1.45
31.6 3.89
35.9 10.7
40.3
0.56
27.5 1.48
31.7 3.98
36.0 10.9
40.4
0.50
27.6 1.51
31.0 4.07
36.1 11.22 40.5
0.59
27.7 1.55
3.19 4.17
36.2 11.48 40.6
0.60
27.8 1.58
32.0 4.27
36.3 11.75 40.7
0.62
27.9 1.62
32.1 4.37
36.4 12.02 40.8
0.63
28.0 1.66
32.2 4.47
36.5 12.30 40.9
0.65
28.1 1.70
32.3 4.57
36.6 12.59 41.0
0.66
28.2 1.74
32.4 4.68
36.7 12.88 41.1
0.68
28.3 1.78
32.5 4.79
36.8 13.18 41.2
0.69
28.4 1.82
32.6 4.90
36.9 13.49 41.3
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-34
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-6.
Watts-to-dBm (Contd)
Watts dBm Watts
dBm Watts
dBm Watts dBm
0.71
28.5 1.86
32.7 5.01
37.0 13.80 41.4
0.72
28.6 1.91
32.8 5.13
37.1 14.13 41.5
0.74
28.7 1.95
32.9 5.25
37.2 14.45 41.6
0.76
28.8
2.00
33.0 5.37
37.3 14.79 41.7
0.78
28.9
2.04
33.1 5.50
37.4 15.14 41.8
0.79
29.0
2.09
33.2 5.62
37.5 15.49 41.9
0.81
29.1
2.14
33.3 5.75
37.6 15.85 42.0
0.83
29.2
2.19
33.4 5.89
37.7 16.22 42.1
0.85
29.3
2.24
33.5 6.03
37.8 16.60 42.2
0.87
29.4
2.29
33.6 6.17
37.9 16.98 42.3
0.89
29.5
2.34
33.7 6.31
38.0 17.38 42.4
0.91
29.6
2.40 33.8 6.46
38.1 17.78 42.5
0.93
29.7
2.45
33.9 6.61
30.2 18.20 42.6
0.95
29.8
2.51
34.0 6.76
38.3 18.62 42.7
0.90
29.9
2.57
34.1 6.92
38.4 19.05 42.8
1.00
30.0
2.63
34.2 7.08
38.5 19.50 42.9
1.02
30.1
2.69
34.3 7.24
38.6 19.95 43.0
1.05
30.2
2.75
34.4 7.41
38.7 20.89 43.2
1.07
30.3
2.82
34.5 7.59
38.8 21.38 43.3
1.10
30.4
2.95
34.7 7.76
38.9 21.88 43.4
1.12
30.5
3.02
34.8 7.94
39.0 22.39 43.5
1.15
30.6
3.09
34.9 8.32
39.2 22.91 43.6
1.17
30.7
3.16
35.0 8.51
39.3 23.44 43.7
1.20
30.8
3.24
35.1 8.71
39.4 23.99 43.8
1.23
30.9
3.31
35.2 8.91
39.5 24.55 43.9
1.26
31.0
3.39
35.3 9.12
39.6 25.12 44.0
1.29
31.1
3.47
35.4 9.55
39.8 25.70 44.1
26.30 44.2
70.79
48.5 186.20 52.7 26.30 44.2
26.92 44.3
72.44
48.6 190.54 52.8 26.92 44.3
27.54 44.4
74.13
48.7 194.98 52.9 27.54 44.4
28.18 44.5
75.85
48.8 199.52 53.0 28.18 44.5
28.84 44.6
77.62
48.9 204.17 53.1 28.84 44.6
29.51 44.7
79.43
49.0 208.92 53.2 29.51 44.7
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-35
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-6.
Watts-to-dBm (Contd)
Watts dBm Watts
dBm Watts
dBm Watts dBm
30.90 44.9
81.28
49.1 213.79 53.3 30.90 44.9
31.62 45.0
83.17
49.2 218.77 53.4 31.62 45.0
32.36 45.1
85.11
49.3 223.87 53.5 32.36 45.1
33.11 45.2
87.09
49.4 229.08 53.6 33.11 45.2
33.88 45.3
89.12
49.5 234.42 53.7 33.88 45.3
34.67 45.4
91.20
49.6 239.88 53.8 34.67 45.4
35.48 45.5
93.32
49.7 245.47 53.9 35.48 45.5
36.31 45.6
95.49
49.8 251.18 54.0 36.31 45.6
37.15 45.7
97.72
49.9 263.02 54.2 37.15 45.7
38.02 45.8 100.00 50.0 269.15 54.3 38.02 45.8
38.90 45.9 102.32 50.1 275.42 54.4 38.90 45.9
39.81 46.0 104.71 50.2 281.83 54.5 39.81 46.0
40.74 46.1 107.15 50.3 288.40 54.6 40.74 46.1
41.69 46.2 109.64 50.4 295.12 54.7 41.69 46.2
42.66 46.3 112.20 50.5 301.99 54.8 42.66 46.3
43.65 46.4 114.81 50.6 309.02 54.9 43.65 46.4
44.67 46.5 117.48 50.7 316.22 55.0 44.67 46.5
45.71 46.6 120.22 50.8 323.59 55.1 45.71 46.6
46.77 46.7 123.02 50.9 331.13 55.2 46.77 46.7
47.86 46.8 125.89 51.0 338.84 55.3 47.86 46.8
48.98 46.9 128.82 51.1 346.73 55.4 48.98 46.9
50.11 47.1 131.82 51.2 354.81 55.5 50.11 47.1
51.28 47.1 134.89 51.3 363.07 55.6 51.28 47.1
52.48 47.2 138.03 51.4 371.53 55.7 52.48 47.2
53.70
473
141.25 51.5 380.18 55.8 53.70
473
54.95 47.4 144.54 51.6 389.04 55.9 54.95 47.4
56.23 47.5 147.91 51.7 398.10 56.0 56.23 47.5
57.54 47.6 151.35 51.8 407.38 56.1 57.54 47.6
58.88 47.7 154.88 51.9 416.86 56.2 58.88 47.7
60.25 47.8 158.48 52.0 426.57 56.3 60.25 47.8
61.65 47.9 162.18 52.1 436.51 56.4 61.65 47.9
63.09 48.0 165.95 52.2 446.68 56.5 63.09 48.0
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-36
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-6.
Watts-to-dBm (Contd)
Watts dBm Watts
dBm Watts
dBm Watts dBm
66.06 48.2 173.78 52.4 467.73 56.7 66.06 48.2
67.60 48.3 177.82 52.5 478.63 56.8 67.60 48.3
69.18 48.4 181.97 52.6 489.77 56.9 69.18 48.4
Table 12-7. Cell Site Station Log Format (Sheet 1 of 2)
AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD
Date _________
Page 1 of _____
Cell Site Identification _________________ Operator's Signature _____________
Equipment Used _____________________ Calibration Date ______________
Signal level at the J3 port of the RTU Switch Panel for LAC 0 _________ dBm
Radio ID
Carrier
Power Level
Peak Frequency Deviation
Frequency
Chan
Channel
Meas
Foam
Foam
Input
Eff
No
Frequency
MHz
Freq
Jmpr
Jmpr
to TX
Rad
Err
Watts
dBm
Ant
Pwr
dBm
(ERP)
kHz
kHz
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Hz
1004
1004
SAT
10 kHz
-16
0.0
kHz
0 dBm
dBm
dBm
kHz
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(10)
(11)
SETUP - RCUs
VOICE - RCUs
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-37
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-7. Cell Site Station Log Format (Contd) (Sheet 1 of 2)
AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD
Table 12-8.
Cell Site Station Log Format (Sheet 2 of 2)

AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD
(continued)
Page _____ of _____
Radio ID
Carrier
Power Level
Peak Frequency Deviation
Frequency
Chan
Channel
Meas
Foam
Foam
Input
Eff
1004
1004
SAT
10 kHz
No
Frequency
Freq
Jmpr
Jmpr
to TX
Rad
-16
0.0
kHz
0 dBm
MHz
Err
Watts
dBm
Hz
Ant
Pwr
dBm
dBm
dBm
(ER
P)
kHz
kHz
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
kHz
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
VOICE - RCUs
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-38
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
(10)
(11)
Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests
Table 12-8.
Cell Site Station Log Format (Contd)(Sheet 2 of 2)

AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
12-39
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
12-40
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
13
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Contents
■
Contents
13-1
■
Improved Boot Read-Only Memory (ROM) / Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) Update
13-2
■
NVM Image for Single-Board RCU (SBRCU)
13-3
■
Keying Multiple RCU Transmitters
13-4
■
Opening Transmit and Receive Audio
13-5
■
Cell Site Power Measurements
13-6
■
Transmit and Receive Audio Level Measurements
13-7
■
Supervisory Audio and Signaling Tone Detection
13-8
■
Remote Data Link Reconfiguration
13-9
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
13-1
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Improved Boot Read-Only Memory
(ROM) / Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
Update
Radio hardware self-identification is built into the Boot ROMs of the SBRCU, DRU,
and EDRU. They are all capable of returning codes that identify their hardware
type. Using this information, NVM updates are now performed as follows:
■
The decision is made at the MSC to perform an NVM update.
■
The Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) requests the Radio Control
Complex (RCC) at the Cell Site (CS) to identify the radio’s hardware type.
■
The RCC sends a command to read the radio’s Boot ROM and returns the
code identifying the radio’s hardware type to the ECP. The SBRCU, DRU,
and EDRU all return their unique identifier codes. Because of its older
technology, the RCU will not respond. The NVM update process takes this
into account.
■
The RCC returns the radio’s hardware identification to the ECP.
■
The ECP downloads the NVM image.
If the hardware identification received by the ECP does not match the type stored
in the NVM DataBase, the NVM update is not performed.
For existing radios, this feature ensures that no radio is put out of service or
damaged because of an incorrect NVM. For the installation of future radios, this
feature supports the use of various differing radio technologies with the assurance
that their NVM updates will be performed correctly.
The MSC software subsystems affected by the improved Boot ROM / NVM
Update are RCV, TR, TI, and NVM.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
13-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Enhanced Maintenance Features
NVM Image for Single-Board RCU
(SBRCU)
The improved Boot ROM / NVM Update feature also supports the SBRCU and
greatly increases its capacity. The SBRCU has 64K of RAM. The RCU has 16K of
RAM. Previously, because the SBRCU did not have an NVM image of its own, it
used the RCU image.
After the RCU image was downloaded into the SBRCU, the SBRCU was left with
48K of RAM (64 - 16 = 48). This 48K of RAM was left unusable because as far as
the RCU’s NVM image was concerned it did not exist. The 48K RAM was not
recognized by the RCU’s NVM image and could not be accessed and used for
enhancements or new AMPS features. The new SBRCU image can recognize
and therefore utilize all of the SBRCU’s RAM and can, therefore, support and
implement enhancements and new features developed for the SBRCU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
13-3
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Keying Multiple RCU Transmitters
Starting with Series II Cell Site Release 4.3, the CFR command provided the
capability to turn on transmitters of several Radio Channel Units (RCUs)
simultaneously. The following options are available:
■
Turn on any number (one to all) of RCU transmitters of a cell site by
executing several CONFIG options sequentially.
■
A single CONFIG option can specify adding/removing all the RCUs on a
specified transmit face having a Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) and/or
Lightwave Microcell Transceiver (LMT).
■
A single CONFIG option can specify adding/removing up to 16 individual
RCUs.
The cell site software stores the operational state of each RCU, then removes the
RCU from service. At the end of the session, all the RCUs that are in the session
are unconditionally restored to the operational state at the time they were last
added to the session. When multiple RCUs are turned on, only the CONFIG,
VRADPC, XMITC, START, and STOP options are supported. All the RCUs in the
session are given the same treatment for the XMITC and VRADPC options.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
13-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Opening Transmit and Receive Audio
Release 4.3 also supports an additional option of the CFR command that allows
the opening of the RCU transmit/receive audio while maintaining the voice
connections to a specified DS1/DS0. The RCU under test has to be out-ofservice. This feature connects the Voice RCU (V-RCU) to a specified DS0/1. The
cell ensures that the specified DS0/1 is unassigned or is currently assigned to the
specified RCU. This feature can perform receiver sensitivity tests and can verify
the effect of network transmission and receive level parameters in translations.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
13-5
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Cell Site Power Measurements
Beginning with Release 4.3, the cell site can perform transmit and receive power
level measurements at the specified Radio Frequency (RF) levels and report them
to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The request is issued by the MEAS:CELL
command, which supports various options including the RF level and EXT. The
EXT option allows the use of external test equipment to generate the test signal or
to detect the RCU signal. When EXT is not specified, the Radio Test Unit (RTU)
generates and detects the test signal.
The feature also supports a range of RCUs to perform the measurements. For
each requested RCU, the feature sequentially repeats the following process at the
cell site:
1.
Stores the current operational state of the first requested RCU
2.
Performs the specified measurements using the RTU
3.
Reports measurements to the user
4.
Unconditionally restores the RCU to its original operational state.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
13-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Transmit and Receive Audio Level
Measurements
The MEAS command performs transmit/receive audio level measurements and
reports them to the user. The system Clock and Tone (CAT) board provides the
specified tone and measures the audio level unless the EXT option is specified.
The cell reports the audio levels as measured by the CAT board.
The user can specify one of the following tones:
■
404 Hz at -16 dBm
■
1004 Hz at -16 dBm
■
1004 Hz at 0 dBm
■
2804 Hz at -16 dBm.
The feature also supports a range of RCUs to perform the measurements. The
feature sequentially repeats the following process for each requested RCU. The
cell site will:
■
Store the current operational state of the first requested RCU
■
Perform the specified measurements using the RTU and CAT
■
Report measurements to the user
■
Unconditionally restore the RCU to its original operational state.
When the EXT option is specified, an external audio signal (for example, mobile
audio) can be injected or an external audio analyzer can be used to detect the
audio levels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
13-7
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Supervisory Audio and Signaling Tone
Detection
The MEAS command is used for the detection of the Supervisory Audio Tone
(SAT) and the Signaling Tone (ST). If the EXT option is specified, an external test
signal has to be injected in the Voice-RCU receive path. Otherwise, the RTU
generates the test RF signal with the specified SAT and/or ST. The cell reports for
each SAT whether it was detected or not (reports no SAT, multiple SAT, or
incorrect SAT).
As previously stated, measurements can be performed for a range of RCUs.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
13-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Enhanced Maintenance Features
Remote Data Link Reconfiguration
Beginning with Release 4.3 there are two ways to update data link parameters: by
Factory Installation Test System (FITS) and by cell data links (that is, from the
MSC). While changing data link parameters from the MSC, the cell remains in
service. However, at least one Core Processor Unit (CPU) must have the correct
current data link options to keep the cell site in service. The new data link
parameters are downloaded to the inactive (mate) CPU. A Radio Control Complex
(that is, Cell Site Controller) side switch is then made, and the parameters are
copied from the new active, updated CPU to the new mate CPU.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
13-9
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
13-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14
Corrective Maintenance Introduction
Contents
■
■
■
Contents
14-1
Status Display Pages
14-2
ECP Craft Shell
14-2
Maintenance Request Administrator
14-3
Maintenance Units
14-4
AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
14-6
TDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
14-7
CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
14-9
Maintenance States
14-12
Maintenance states
14-12
Active
14-12
Standby
14-12
Unequipped
14-12
Out-Of-Service
14-12
Growth State
14-12
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-1
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
Maintenance Tools
This section explains the status reporting, diagnostic, and maintenance tools and
procedures required to keep a cell site operating smoothly and to recover from
any malfunction or other trouble that might occur that would damage the efficient
operation of the cell site.
During routine operation of the cell site, if any malfunction or other trouble occurs
and no automatic recovery action is taken, or automatic recovery action fails, then
the technician must intercede and perform the necessary diagnostic and recovery
procedures. Three of the interfaces that will help the technician maintain and
restore the system are briefly discussed first, followed by specific procedures for
particular cell site problems.
Status Display
Pages
Status display pages are the principle interface between the technician/operator
and the Series II cellular system. They allow the technician to view system status,
generate status reports, enter commands, and receive system responses.
Status display pages are graphical displays that represent the hardware and
software subsystems of the cell site and also display a nearly real-time status of
all the cell sites serving the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). Fault conditions
received by the ECP for any of the cell sites on the network are indicated at the
top of the status display page via colors and flashing indicators. The technician
may then bring up a visual display of the particular cell site that issued the fault
condition.
Status display pages allow the ECP technician do the following:
■
Check the status of cell site hardware units
■
Generate output reports on cell site hardware units
■
Remove (deactivate
■
Restore (activate)
■
Switch cell site hardware units;
—
Inhibit
—
Allow
— Run diagnostics on cell site hardware units.
The commands entered using the status display page are entered at the
command line at the bottom of the status display page.
ECP Craft Shell
The ECP Craft Shell is another one of several software interfaces between the
technician and the ECP. The same commands that are entered via status display
pages may also be entered at the ECP Craft Shell. This section will describe
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
customized commands that can be entered at either the ECP Craft Shell or at the
command line at the bottom of a status display page.
This section describes entering customized commands at the ECP Craft Shell
prompt or at the command line at the bottom of a status display page.
Maintenance
Request
Administrator
Maintenance activities for the cell site's primary and growth radio channel frames
(RCFs) are done through a series of software subsystems that reside in the radio
control complex (RCC). One such software subsystem is the maintenance request
administrator (MRA), which provides maintenance personnel with control, routing,
and diagnostic maintenance procedures.
MRA receives maintenance requests from the ECP, performs the maintenance
activities associated with the requests, and returns the results and collected data
(if any) to the ECP. MRA handles requests to return information about the cell site,
to remove (deactivate) cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site
equipment, to perform diagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on.
The MRA subsystem not only responds to external requests from the ECP, but
also responds to internal requests submitted by other software subsystems, such
as those performing automatic fault recovery or scheduled maintenance.
The rest of this section describes the Cell Site units that require maintenance, the
types of maintenance states that exist, and the maintenance actions that can be
taken.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-3
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
Maintenance Units
Hardware elements in the primary and growth RCFs are identified in Table 14-1.
The NULL, c (for conditional), u (for unconditional), yes, and no entries under the
maintenance actions in the Maintenance Actions table indicate the possible
maintenance actions for a give hardware element.
Table 14-1 does not list the Maintenance units where obtaining status is the only
maintenance action possible. The units not mentioned are the LAC, RCG, RFG,
RFTG, GPS, and OTU/LMT (microcell only).
A Series II Cell Site can have either an RFG or an RFTG, but not both. If the Cell
Site has no CDMA radios, the RFG is installed; if the Cell Site has at least one
CDMA radio, the RFTG is installed. An individual oscillator plug-in unit in the RFG
or RFTG is denoted as RG (for reference generator) in the status display pages.
A BCR and its associated BIU and ACU form a CDMA radio set—the BBA (for
BCR-BIU-ACU). For OA&M purposes, the BBA is treated as a single maintenance
unit.
NOTE:
Unlike the AMPS or TDMA radio hardware, the CDMA radio hardware
consists of an entire shelf of plug-in units.
Table 14-1.
Cell Site Maintenance Units and Actions (Sheet 1 of 2)
Maintenance Action
Obtain
Status
Unit
Subunit
Remove
Restore
Diagnose
RCC*
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
yes
RCC
CPU
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
RCC
MEM
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
RCC
NCI
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
RCC
CPI
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
RCC
AFI
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
CAT
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
yes
DS1
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
DFI
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
yes
DL
S-RCU
†
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-4
Switch to
Redundant
Unit
Stop a
Diagnostic
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
Table 14-1.
Cell Site Maintenance Units and Actions (Contd) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Maintenance Action
Unit
V-RCU‡
**
Switch to
Redundant
Unit
Obtain
Status
Subunit
Remove
Restore
Diagnose
Stop a
Diagnostic
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
S-SBRCU
†
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
yes
V-SBRCU
‡
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
**
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
L-RCU
L-SBRCU
RTU
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
††
NULL
yes
yes
no
yes
V-DRU
‡
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
B-DRU
‡‡
NULL
yes
yes
no
yes
**
D-DRU
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
††
NULL
yes
yes
no
yes
V-EDRU
‡
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
B-EDRU
‡‡
NULL
yes
yes
no
yes
TRTU
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
SCT
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
yes
CCC
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
CCU
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
CCU
CE
no
no
no
no
no
no
BBA
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
yes
CRTU
NULL
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
yes
L-DRU
D-EDRU
The RCC is denoted as CSC (for Cell Site controller) in the status display pages.
The S-RCU and S-SBRCU are denoted as SU (for setup radio) in the status display
pages.
‡
The V-RCU, V-SBRCU, V-DRU, and V-EDRU are denoted as RA (for voice radio) in the
status display pages.
**
The L-RCU, L-SBRCU, and L-DRU are denoted as LC (for location radio) in the status
display
pages.
††
The D-DRU and D-EDRU are denoted as DCCH (for digital control channel radio) in the
status
display pages.
‡‡
A V-RCU or V-SBRCU may also be configured as a beacon radio, which is denoted as
BC (for
beacon radio) in the status display pages. A beacon radio transmits at a fixed
power level and
is instrumental in the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff procedure.
†
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-5
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
AMPS Radio
Maintenance Units
and Personality
Types
For the RCU radio type, there is one non-volatile memory (NVM) image file for the
setup radio (S-RCU), analog voice radio (V-RCU), and analog locate radio
(L-RCU). At initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other
specific parameter values to each RCU. There is another NVM image file for the
RTU.
For the SBRCU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the S-SBRCU,
V-SBRCU, and L-SBRCU. As of ECP Release 8.0, the Cell Site software
downloads a new NVM image file to the SBRCU, separate and distinct from the
NVM image file downloaded to the RCU.
Prior to ECP Release 8.0, the Cell Site downloaded the same NVM image file to
both the RCU and SBRCU radio types.
The following list provides a brief description of each AMPS radio personality type
(Refer to Figure 14-1):
■
Setup radio: Performs the analog setup function—establishes calls via the
analog control channel (ACC) with mobile subscribers using AMPS or
IS-54B compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles.
■
Analog voice radio: Performs the analog voice function—carries one
over-the-air AMPS call.
■
Analog locate radio: Performs the analog locate function—assists with
handoffs when the established AMPS call can be better served by an
adjacent sector or cell by measuring the signal strength and verifying the
supervisory audio tone (SAT) of the mobile targeted for handoff.
An RCU or SBRCU having a voice radio personality may also have a beacon radio
personality. Thus, an RCU or SBRCU can serve two functions concurrently: (1)
carry an over-the-air AMPS call and (2) provide signal strength measurements for
the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff (MAHO) procedure. Because the RF carrier
power level remains fixed for beacon radios, the dual-personality RCU or SBRCU
is ineligible for dynamic power control.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
TECHNOLOGY
TYPE:
AMPS
HARDWARE
TYPE:
PERSONALITY
TYPE:
RCU
S-RCU
V-RCU
NVM IMAGE
SBRCU
L-RCU
S-SBRCU
V-SBRCU
RTU
L-SBRCU
NVM IMAGE
RTU
NVM
IMAGE
Figure 14-1. AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Type
TDMA Radio
Maintenance Units
and Personality
Types
For the DRU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the digital control channel
radio (D-DRU), digital voice radio (V-DRU), and digital beacon radio (B-DRU). At
initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other specific
parameter values to each DRU. There is another NVM image file for the digital
locate radio (L-DRU), and still another for the TRTU.
For the EDRU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the D-EDRU, V-EDRU,
and B-EDRU.
A DRU or EDRU provides a basic modulation efficiency of three user channels per
30-kHz of bandwidth. The three user channels are designated user channel 1,
user channel 2, and user channel 3. Each user channel is assigned one trunk
(DS0) on the T1 line and one duplex timeslot on the RCF internal TDM bus.
NOTE:
TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
The following list is a brief description of each TDMA radio personality type (Refer
to Figure 14-2):
■
Digital voice radio: Performs the digital traffic channel function—carries
up to three over-the-air TDMA calls.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-7
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
■
Digital control channel (DCCH) radio: Performs the digital setup and
short message service functions—establishes calls via the DCCH with
mobile subscribers using IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode
mobiles. The DCCH is carried on user channel 1. Typically, there is one
DCCH per physical antenna face, or sector, in a TDMA system.
■
Digital beacon radio: Performs the digital beacon channel function—
transmits at a fixed level at all times to provide signal strength
measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure. Typically, there is one
beacon radio per physical antenna face in a TDMA system.
■
Digital locate radio: Performs the digital locate channel function—assists
with handoffs when the established TDMA call can be better served by an
adjacent sector or cell by measuring the signal strength and verifying the
digital verification color code (DVCC) of the IS-54B or IS-136 compliant
TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile targeted for handoff. The digital locate
radio is instrumental in the DVCC verification procedure.
A D-DRU or D-EDRU may also carry digital traffic and beacon channels. Thus, a
D-DRU or D-EDRU can serve three functions concurrently: (1) perform the digital
setup function—establish calls via the DCCH with mobile subscribers using
IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles, (2) carry one or two over-theair TDMA calls, and (3) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA
MAHO procedure. Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for DCCH
radios, the D-DRU or D-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control.
The EDRU, unlike the DRU, will be able to carry more than one DCCH. That is, in
a future release, an EDRU will be able carry one, two, or three DCCHs.
A B-DRU or B-EDRU may also carry digital traffic channels. Thus, a B-DRU or
B-EDRU can serve two functions concurrently: (1) provide signal strength
measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure and (2) carry one, two, or even
three over-the-air TDMA calls. (A digital beacon channel may double as a digital
traffic channel.) Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for beacon radios,
the B-DRU or B-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control.
A V-DRU or V-EDRU may only carry digital traffic channels. A V-DRU or V-EDRU
can carry one, two, or three digital traffic channels.
An L-DRU may only carry digital locate channels. An L-DRU can carry one, two, or
three digital locate channels.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
TECHNOLOGY
TYPE:
TDMA
HARDWARE
TYPE:
PERSONALITY
TYPE:
DRU
TRTU
EDRU
D-DRU V-DRU B-DRU L-DRU
TRTU
D-EDRU V-EDRU B-EDRU L-EDRU E-TRTU
(FUTURE) (FUTURE)
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM IMAGE
NVM IMAGE
Figure 14-2. TDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
CDMA Radio
Maintenance Units
and Personality
Types
For each CDMA cluster (one CCC managing up to seven CCUs), there is one
NVM image file for each of the following elements:
■
the CCC
■
the pilot/sync/access (P/S/A) CE personality
■
the page CE personality
■
the traffic CE personality
■
the orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS) CE personality.
At initialization, the CCC downloads the personality-type image files and other
specific parameter values into active memory of the CCUs—the CCC downloads
exactly one personality-type image file to each CCU CE. There is another NVM
image file for the BBA, another for the CRTUi, and still another for the SCT.
The CCU contains two on-board CEs. Thus, a CCC can manage up to 14 CEs.
For the cellular band class (850 MHz), the TIA IS-95A standard defines two
common carriers: the primary CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel
283 for System A (A band) and 384 for System B (B band), and the secondary
CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel 691 for System A (A’ band) and
777 for System B (B’ band). Each CDMA omni cell or cell sector must be assigned
at least one common carrier. For the PCS band class (1900 MHz), candidates for
common CDMA carriers range from channel numbers 25 to 1175 in increments
of 25.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-9
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
Each common CDMA carrier (primary, secondary) on an antenna face has one
CE configured as the P/S/A CE and another configured as the page CE. The two
CEs may be on the same CCU or on different CCUs within the same CDMA
cluster.
The following list provides a brief description of each CDMA CE personality type
(Refer to Figure 14-3):
■
Pilot/Sync/Access CE: Performs part of the CDMA call setup function—
establishes calls with mobile subscribers using IS-95A or IS-95B compliant
CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles.
The pilot channel is an unmodulated, direct-sequence spread-spectrum
signal transmitted continuously by each sector of a CDMA cell. It allows the
mobile to acquire the timing of the forward control channels and provides a
coherent carrier phase reference for demodulating the sync and paging
channels.
The sync channel provides time-of-day and frame synchronization to the
mobile. The mobile uses this channel to acquire cell and sector-specific
information.
The access channel is a CDMA reverse channel used for short signaling
message exchange such as mobile registration, mobile call origination, and
response to pages. The access channel is a slotted random access
channel used by mobiles to communicate to the Cell Site.
■
Page CE: Performs part of the CDMA call setup function—transmits control
information to idle mobiles during mobile powerup and when a mobile is
acquiring a new Cell Site. It conveys pages to the mobiles.
■
Traffic CE: Performs the CDMA traffic channel function—carries one overthe-air CDMA call. A traffic channel, which is a communication path
between a mobile station and a Cell Site, carries user and signaling
information. The term traffic channel implies a forward and reverse pair.
■
OCNS CE: Simulates a specified number of mobile users operating in a
specified sector on a specified carrier. OCNS allows generation of a
simulated user load on the CDMA forward channels in order to assist in
verifying the capacity of the CDMA system.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
TECHNOLOGY
TYPE:
HARDWARE
TYPE:
CDMA
CCC
BCR*
CCU
NVM
IMAGE
CE
CE
BIU*
ACU*
NVM
IMAGE
CRTUi
SCT
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
* BCR-BIU-ACU = BBA
PERSONALITY
TYPE:
P/S/A CE PAGE CE TRAFFIC CE OCNS CE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
NVM
IMAGE
Figure 14-3. CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-11
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
Maintenance States
During installation, each unit is assigned an equipment state of unequipped,
growth, or equipped via translations (system configuration parameter settings).
Each equipped unit is further assigned a state of active, out-of-service, or standby
(redundant unit only) via maintenance requests sent to the MRA subsystem.
Maintenance states
The meanings of the maintenance states are as follows:
Active
Unit is available for its intended use; for example, an RCU can service a call, the
RTU can be used to test analog radio equipment, etc.
Standby
Unit is available to be placed into the active state; applies only to redundant units
RCC, CAT, SCT, BBA, and setup radio (S-RCU, S-SBRCU).
(Because the BBA is a single point failure for a sector, redundant BBAs—one
active and the other in standby mode—may be installed for increased reliability.
Currently, redundant BBAs may only be installed in the non-subcell configuration.)
(Setup radios are considered redundant when there are spare setup radios at the
Cell Site. For Cell Sites having the automatic radio reconfiguration—ARR—feature
active for setup radios, there are no spare setup radios at the Cell Site: in that
case, setup radios are not redundant.)
Unequipped
Unit exists in the translations data base strictly as a place holder. MRA will reject
any maintenance request targeted for an unequipped unit.
Out-Of-Service
Unit is not available for its intended use (exact opposite of active state), but is
available to be diagnosed or updated with NVM.
Growth State
Unit is not available to be placed in use, but is available to be diagnosed or
updated with NVM.
Throughout the maintenance process, MRA records locally the maintenance
status of the Cell Site equipment in the equipment status table. The maintenance
status of equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECP
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance - Introduction
requests an update. The status of Cell Site equipment appears in the status
display pages.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
14-13
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
14-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Contents
■
Contents
15-1
■
Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA)
15-2
■
Diagnose
15-3
■
Related Documents
15-4
Stop a Diagnostic
15-4
Obtain Status
15-4
Related Documents
15-4
Qualifiers Associated with the Out-Of-Service (OOS) State
15-4
Dual Server Group Out-Of-Service (OOS) Limits
New RC/V Translation Parameters
■
Remove/Restore/Switch Actions
15-6
15-6
15-7
Conditional Remove
15-7
Unconditional Remove
15-11
Conditional and Unconditional Restore
15-13
Related Documents
15-16
Switch to a Redundant Unit
15-16
Related Documents
15-17
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-1
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Maintenance Request Administrator
(MRA)
Maintenance activities for the cell site’s primary and growth radio channel frames
(RCFs) are done through a series of software subsystems that reside in the radio
control complex (RCC). One such software subsystem is the maintenance request
administrator (MRA), which provides maintenance personnel with control, routing,
and diagnostic maintenance procedures.
MRA receives maintenance requests from the ECP, performs the maintenance
activities associated with the requests, and returns the results and collected data
(if any) to the ECP. MRA handles requests to return information about the cell site,
to remove (deactivate) cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site
equipment, to perform diagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on.
The MRA subsystem not only responds to external requests from the ECP, but
also responds to internal requests submitted by other software subsystems, such
those performing automatic fault recovery or scheduled maintenance.
The rest of this section describes the Cell Site units that require maintenance, the
types of maintenance states that exist, and the maintenance actions that can be
taken.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-2
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Diagnose
The diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a unit in the out-of-service or
growth state, to a redundant unit in the standby state, or to a redundant unit in the
active state. In the latter case, MRA initiates a switch before executing the
diagnose request.
NOTE:
For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the active state but the mate is
out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with no action taken. In addition, if the
targeted unit is an active SCT, the diagnose aborts with no action taken
even if the SCT has a standby mate.
In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC, CCU, or
CRTU in the active state. The first step in a diagnose maintenance action for an
active CCC, CCU, or CRTU is the automatic execution of a conditional remove.
Whether a unit passes or fails diagnostics, the unit is left in the out-of-service state
except for a unit in the growth state. A unit initially in the growth state remains in
the growth state. The diagnostic test results (pass, fail) are reported to the ECP.
A diagnostic test can be called for the whole RCC (in which all controller circuit
boards are tested), or a diagnostic test can be called for an individual controller
circuit board (for example, CPU).
For diagnose requests pertaining to radios involved in ARR, you need to be aware
of the following conditions:
■
A diagnose request without the qualifier orig is applied to the replacement
radio; the rules governing the behavior of the diagnose command remain in
effect dur-ing an ARR condition. A diagnose request of a setup, DCCH,
beacon, or analog locate radio involved in an ARR condition is rejected
because diagnosing an active unit is not permitted.
To diagnose a replacement radio, first unconditionally remove the radio, then
diagnose the radio. Whether the replacement radio passes or fails diagnostics, the
radio is left in the out-of-service state and the ARR condition remains in effect.
■
A diagnose request with the qualifier orig is applied to the original radio;
whether the original radio passes or fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the
out-of-service state and the ARR condition remains in effect.
■
A diagnose request applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) is
rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. An
output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed by
the ARR fea-ture and is not available.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-3
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Related
Documents
For more information on the diagnose maintenance action, refer to the DGN
CELL, DGN CELL DL, and DGN CELL SG commands in the Input Messages
manual (401-610- 055).
Stop a Diagnostic
The stop maintenance action stops a diagnostic test on a maintenance unit. If the
diagnostic test request is still in the job queue, MRA removes the request from the
queue. If the diagnostic test is running, MRA aborts the test.
MRA leaves the unit in the out-of-service or growth state unless the unit is a CCC,
CCU, BBA, or CRTU. Upon terminating a diagnostic test for one of those units,
MRA returns the unit to the state it was in just prior to the diagnostic request
(out-of-service, growth, or active) unless the diagnostic test is already running on
the unit, in which case the unit is left in the out-of-service state.
For more information on the stop a diagnostic maintenance action, refer to the
STOP DGN CELL, STOP DGN CELL DL, and STOP DGN CELL SG commands
in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055).
Obtain Status
The obtain status maintenance action determines the status (state) of a
maintenance unit, that is, MRA reads the recorded status from the equipment
status table and forwards the status to the ECP. In addition, MRA automatically
reports the maintenance status of equipment to the ECP whenever the status
changes. A status display page is refreshed with new maintenance status every
15 seconds.
Related
Documents
For more information on the obtain status maintenance action, refer to the OP
CELL, OP CELL DL, OP CELL DLOPTS, OP CELL EXTERN, OP CELL
GENERIC, OP CELL OVLD, OP CELL SCSM, OP CELL SG, and OP CELL
VERSION commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055).
Qualifiers
Associated with
the Out-Of-Service
(OOS) State
A maintenance unit can be placed in the out-of-service state due to one of several
reasons. To identify the reason that a unit is in the out-of-service state, MRA
assigns the unit a qualifier in addition to its final state of OOS. MRA assigns a
qualifier to a unit during execution of the maintenance request (See Table 15-1).
Both the qualifier and final state of the unit are reported to the ECP.
Table 15-1.
OOS State Quilifiers
Qualifier
Description
OOS-DGN
The unit is in the out-of-service state due to the successful completion
of a diagnose request.
OOS-FAULT
The unit is in the out-of-service state due to fault detection during
diag-nostics in the Cell Site.
OOS-INITF
The unit is in the out-of-service state due to an unsuccessful initializa-tion process.
OOS-NVMUPT
The unit is in the out-of-service state because its NVM is being updated.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-4
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Table 15-1.
OOS State Quilifiers (Contd)
Qualifier
Description
OOS-RMVD
The unit is in the out-of-service state due to the successful completion
of a remove request.
OOS-TBLANL
This qualifier is used for leaving a unit in OOS state after it has success-fully passed diagnostics but is still reporting faults. This state is
known as the trouble-analysis state.
OOS-CDMAF
The CCC, CCU, or BBA is in the out-of-service state due to no CDMA
timing.
OOS-CFR
The BBA is in the out-of-service state due to its involvement in a
multi-ple configure (MULTI CFR) test.
OOS-DNP
The previously active CCU is in the out-of-service state due to the
removal of two consecutive downstream
CCUs. OOS-POS
The previously active CCU is in the out-of-service state due to the
suc-cessful completion of a remove request of the parent
CCC. OOS-RMVIP
The DS1 is currently being removed.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-5
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Dual Server Group Out-Of-Service
(OOS) Limits
For a Series II Dual Server Group cell, configured as either a 3-sector or 6-sector
cell, Voice Radio Out-Of-Service (OOS) limits can now be set on a per Logical
Antenna Face (LAF) level, rather than on a per-cell level.
Previously, OSS limits functioned as follows: The OOS limits could only be
defined, or set, on a per-cell basis. However, the software that performed OOS
checking for conditional OA&M commands, checked on a per LAF basis.
Therefore, it was possible for per- cell OSS limits to block the testing of radios on a
particular LAF.
This is no longer a problem. The ability to set OOS limits on a per LAF basis
allows the service-provider to set the voice radio OSS limits at the same level at
which the Cell Site software performs the OOS checking for conditional OA&M
commands; that is, at the per LAF level.
New RC/V
Translation
Parameters
This feature adds 4 new AMPS and TDMA Voice Radio OOS limit translations to
the ceqface form, as below:
1.
AMPS Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 0. This parameter defines the
AMPS Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group 0.
2.
AMPS Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 1. This parameter defines the
AMPS Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group 1.
3.
TDMA Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 0. This parameter defines the
TDMA Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group 0.
4.
TDMA Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 1 This parameter defines the
TDMA Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group.
For all 4 translations, the following apply:
■
The view is Per Logical Face.
■
The Allowable Values are 1 to 100% or Blank.
■
The Default is Blank.
■
The Restriction is that, if no value is entered (i.e., Blank), the value defaults
to the Per Cell Voice.
■
Radio Out of Service Limit.
■
Update is allowable.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-6
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Remove/Restore/Switch Actions
Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units through commands
from the ECP or by Cell Site software processes.
The yes and no entries under the maintenance actions in shown in the figures at
the beack of this chapter indicate whether a maintenance action is permitted for a
maintenance unit. In the rows of the table that have NULL in the Subunit column,
the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Unit column; in the
rows of the table that do not have NULL in the Subunit column, the action is
applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Subunit column.
The c and u entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicate whether a
remove or restore maintenance action is conditional or unconditional. In general, a
conditional maintenance request will not result in any action that causes calls to
be dropped or service denied to a user during the course of command execution;
if executing a conditional request would violate either condition, MRA would reject
the request. In contrast, an unconditional maintenance request will result in the
execution of the request immediately or within five minutes of MRA accepting the
request, with little concern to whether calls are dropped or service denied to a
user during the course of command execution.
If a unit is involved in an automatic radio configuration (ARR) when a maintenance
action is applied, the maintenance action is applied to the replacement radio
unless orig is specified in the maintenance request, in which case the
maintenance action is applied to the original radio. Any maintenance action
applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) will be rejected because that
functionality is unavailable due to the ARR.
The ARR feature applies to AMPS and TDMA but not to CDMA.
All maintenance actions (remove, restore, diagnose, stop a diagnostic, switch to
redundant unit, and obtain status) are reported to the ECP.
Once a maintenance action has started on a maintenance unit, MRA will reject
any subsequent maintenance-action request for that unit until the current action
has completed with the following exception: for any given unit, an unconditional
maintenance-action request can terminate a conditional maintenance-action
request.
Conditional
Remove
The conditional remove maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance
unit from active or standby to out-of-service. It schedules an event or process to
place the specified maintenance unit to out-of-service assuming that it is
idle_NOT busy. An idle unit is in the active state but not currently performing its
intended purpose; a busy unit is in the active state and currently performing its
intended purpose, such as a V-RCU supporting an active call.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-7
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
If the unit is a busy V-RCU, V-SBRCU, V-DRU, V-EDRU, CCC, or CCU when the
conditional remove action is applied, the unit is blocked (not allowed to accept new
calls), and the remove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as the unit
becomes idle (free of all calls) during the five-minute interval, it is removed from
service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, the conditional remove aborts
with no action taken.
If the unit is a CCC carrying overhead channels, MRA will attempt to migrate the
overhead channels to CEs on the other-side CDMA cluster on the same
shelf_select two idle traffic CEs on the other-side CDMA cluster on the same shelf
and reconfigure them as the overhead channels. The overhead channel CEs for a
common CDMA carrier on an omni cell or cell sector must be on the same CDMA
cluster, that is, must be controlled by the same CCC.
If the unit is a CCU carrying an overhead channel, MRA will attempt to migrate the
overhead channel to another CE on the same CDMA cluster_select an idle traffic
CE on the same CDMA cluster and reconfigure it as the overhead channel. If that
attempt fails, MRA will attempt to migrate the overhead channel to an idle traffic
CE on the other-side CDMA cluster on the same shelf.
If the migration is successful, MRA will initiate a CDMA overhead channel
functional test to verify the operation of the newly assigned overhead channels (or
channel).
For redundant units, if the unit is in the standby state when the conditional remove
action is applied, the unit is removed from service immediately. If the unit is in the
active state and the mate in the standby state when the conditional remove action
is applied, MRA automatically executes a switch before removing the unit from
service. And finally, if the unit is in the active state and the mate in the
out-of-service state when the conditional remove action is applied, the conditional
remove aborts with no action taken. ( Exception: if the BBA out-of-service
threshold limit is set to 100%, the remove request will continue.)
Currently, redundant BBA operation is supported in the non-subcell configuration
but not the subcell configuration. Only simplex BBA operation_one BBA per
CDMA shelf_ is supported in the subcell configuration. Other conditions that will
cause the conditional remove to abort with no action taken are described as
follows:
■
A conditional remove action on a unit in the growth state is not permitted
unless the unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. A conditional remove action of a
CCC, CCU, or BBA in the growth state simply resets the unit; the unit
remains in the growth state.
■
If placing the unit out-of-service would result in exceeding the
out-of-service threshold limit for that type of unit, the conditional remove
action is not permitted.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-8
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
A 100% out-of-service threshold limit for a particular type of unit means that any
number (one to all) of those units may be conditionally removed. A 0%
out-of-service threshold limit for a particular type of unit means that not even one
of those units may be conditionally removed.
Out-of-service threshold limits for analog voice radios, analog locate radios, digital
voice radios, and digital locate radios are translatable, that is, specified using the
recent change/verify (RC/V) subsystem at the ECP (specifically, using RC/V form
cell2). Out-of-service threshold limits for setup radios, DCCH radios, and beacon
radios are not translatable. Effectively, the out-of-service limit for each of these
radio types is 0%, meaning that removing just one such radio would exceed the
radio out-of-service threshold limit.
Out-of-service threshold limits for CDMA traffic CEs and BBAs are translatable on
a per antenna face (sector and carrier) basis using the RC/V form cell2. The range
is 25% to 100%; the default is 25%. Blocked traffic CEs are included in the
out-of-service threshold limit calculations. Overhead CEs (pilot/sync/ access and
page) are not included in the out-of-service threshold limit calculations.
(In a CDMA subcell configuration, MRA adds the individual antenna face
out-of-service threshold limits together to obtain a total out-of-service threshold
limit for the whole subcell. For example, if the face out-of-service threshold limit is
25% and each shelf is equipped with 26 traffic channels, the individual face
out-of-service threshold limit is six traffic channels. If all three faces are served by
all three shelves_a 3-shelf subcell configuration, the total out-of-service threshold
limit for the whole subcell is 18 traffic channels, meaning that MRA would check
for an out-of-service threshold limit of 18 traffic channels for the whole subcell. In
this example, MRA would only allow a single CDMA cluster to be conditionally
removed.)
(The removal of any two adjacent CCUs will break the transmit bus path, thereby
disrupting the transmit data upstream from the break. As an example, removing
CCUs 2 and 3 will also remove CCUs 4 through 7. For a conditional remove
request, MRA will not permit the removal of two adjacent CCUs if the removal
would result in exceeding the traffic CE out-of-service threshold limit.)
■
A conditional remove action on a DS1 or DFI is not permitted if the
out-of-service limit would be exceeded for voice radios.
■
A conditional remove action on a DS1 or DFI is not permitted if that unit
controls the last data link to a Cell Site.
■
A conditional remove action on the last data link to a Cell Site is not
permitted. (Only an unconditional remove action on the last data link can
remove the data link from service.)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-9
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
■
A conditional remove action on an RTU, TRTU, or CRTU involved in
diagnostics of another unit_such as during a setup radio, DCCH radio, or
CDMA radio functional test_is not permitted. (This restriction avoids false
errors that may be generated upon premature termination of the diagnostic
test involving the RTU, TRTU, or CRTU.)
■
A conditional remove action on a CAT or SCT involved in diagnostics of
another unit_that is, CAT or SCT supplying a digital tone source_is not
permitted. (This restriction avoids false errors that may be generated upon
premature termination of the diagnostic test involving the CAT or SCT.)
■
Neither a conditional nor unconditional remove action is permitted on the
last CAT or SCT on a TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1). Note: TDM buses are
always installed "red stripe up."
■
Neither a conditional nor unconditional remove action is permitted on SCT
4 if SCT 5 is already out-of-service, on SCT 5 if SCT 4 is already
out-of-service.
■
A conditional remove action on an active SCT_even though its mate may
be in standby_is not permitted.
(In general, any conditional maintenance request that would normally cause
redundant units to switch is not permitted for SCTs. The switching of SCTs could
leave the associated CDMA hardware_the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving
CDMA timing from the redundant SCTs_in an unknown state, which would require
the manual restore of the affected CCCs.)
■
A conditional remove action on a setup radio having no associated spare is
not permitted. (Only an unconditional remove action on a setup radio
having no associated spare_other than a hard fault_can remove the radio
from service.)
■
A conditional remove action on a DCCH radio is not permitted. (Only an
uncondi-tional remove action on a DCCH radio_other than a hard fault_can
remove the radio from service.)
■
A conditional remove action on a beacon radio is not permitted. (Only an
uncon-ditional remove action on a beacon radio_other than a hard
fault_can remove the radio from service.)
(By definition, a beacon radio may be a B-DRU or a B-EDRU, or a V-RCU
or V-SBRCU configured as a beacon radio. Be aware, though, that
because setup and DCCH radios have their transmitters On all the time
and transmit at fixed power levels, they too may serve as beacon-like
radios.)
■
For radios involved in ARR:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-10
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
— A conditional remove request without the qualifier orig is applied to
the replacement radio; the rules governing the behavior of the
conditional remove command for each type of radio (setup, DCCH,
beacon, analog locate) remain in effect during an ARR condition.
A conditional remove request of a setup, DCCH, or beacon radio
involved in an ARR condition is not permitted. A conditional remove
request of an analog locate radio involved in an ARR condition is
permitted as long as such an action would not violate out-of-service
limits for analog locate radios.
— A conditional remove request with the qualifier orig is applied to the
origi-nal radio; the request is rejected because the orig qualifier is
not sup-ported for the RMV CELL (remove cell) command.
— A conditional remove request applied directly to the replacement
radio (say RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable
due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the
radio is being borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available.
For more information on the remove maintenance action, refer to the RMV CELL
and RMV CELL SG commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055).
Unconditional
Remove
Unconditional remove requests may be service affecting because of the
out-of-service limits that may be exceeded. For example, service to a Cell Site is
affected if the last setup radio is removed.
The unconditional remove maintenance action changes the state of a
maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service. It promptly places the
specified maintenance unit in the out-of-service state unless any of the following
conditions are in effect:
■
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a busy V-RCU, V-SBRCU,
V-DRU, V-EDRU, CCC, CCU, or a BBA having no mate or the mate is
out-of-ser-vice. The remove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as
the unit becomes idle during the five-minute interval, MRA removes the unit
from service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, MRA drops the calls
and removes the unit from service.
Be aware that the removal of any two adjacent CCUs will break the transmit bus
path, thereby disrupting the transmit data upstream from the break. As an
example, removing CCUs 2 and 3 will also remove CCUs 4 through 7. For an
unconditional remove request, MRA will allow the removal of two adjacent CCUs
with no regard for the traffic CE out-of-service threshold limit.
■
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a DS1 or DFI that, if
removed, would result in the exceeding of the out-of-service limit for voice
radios. The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-11
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
■
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a unit in the growth state.
The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken unless the unit is a
CCC, CCU, or BBA. An unconditional remove action of a CCC, CCU, or
BBA in the growth state simply resets the unit; the unit remains in the
growth state.
■
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a redundant RCC, CAT, or
SCT having an out-of-service mate. The unconditional remove aborts with
no action taken.
An unconditional remove action targeted for a redundant setup radio having an
out-of-service mate will be honored immediately by MRA. After the removal, both
the setup radio and its mate will be out-of-service.
Be aware that an unconditional remove request of an active SCT having a standby
mate will result in a SCT switch, which could leave the associated CDMA
hardware_ the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing from the
redundant SCTs_in an unknown state. You would have to manually restore the
affected CCCs.
If an RTU, TRTU, or CRTU is involved in diagnostics of another unit, an
unconditional remove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics,
which may result in the generation of false errors upon premature termination of
the diagnostic test.
Similarly, if a CAT or SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit, an
unconditional remove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics,
which may result in the generation of false errors upon premature termination of
the diagnostic test.
Other conditions pertaining to unconditional remove requests that you need to be
aware of are as follows:
■
If the requested unit is a setup radio having no associated spare, the radio
will be removed without invoking ARR. A warning message appears stating
that the radio removed was a setup radio.
■
If the requested unit is a DCCH radio, the radio will be removed without
invoking ARR, even if it is the last DCCH for the sector. A warning message
appears stat-ing that the radio removed was a DCCH radio.
■
If the requested unit is a beacon radio, the radio will be removed without
invoking ARR. A warning message appears stating that the radio removed
was a beacon radio.
■
For radios involved in ARR:
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-12
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
— An unconditional remove request without the qualifier orig is applied
to the replacement radio; when the radio is removed, MRA
remembers the ARR condition; when the radio is restored, MRA
continues the ARR_the ARR condition remains in effect.
— An unconditional remove request with the qualifier orig is applied to
the original radio; the request is rejected because the orig qualifier is
not sup-ported for the RMV CELL (remove cell) command.
— An unconditional remove request applied directly to the replacement
radio (say RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable
due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the
radio is being borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available.
Conditional and
Unconditional
Restore
The restore maintenance action can be applied to units that are in the
out-of-service, active, or standby state. Except for a unit that is already
out-of-service or in the growth state, the first step in a conditional restore
maintenance action is the automatic execution of a conditional remove. Therefore,
all the restrictions associated with a conditional remove are also associated with a
conditional restore.
Similarly, except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state, the
first step in an unconditional restore maintenance action is the automatic
execution of an unconditional remove. Therefore, the lack of restrictions
associated with an unconditional remove_unconditional remove requests may be
service affecting_are also associated with an unconditional restore.
The conditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance
unit to active. It schedules an event or process to restore the specified
maintenance unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test. If the unit fails the
diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. The failed unit remains in the
out-of-service state.
The unconditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a
maintenance unit to active. It schedules an event or process to restore the
specified maintenance unit without first running a diagnostic test on the unit.
NOTE:
For a redundant unit (RCC, CAT, SCT, BBA, or setup radio), you can specify
the STBY parameter in the RST command line to restore the unit to the
standby state.
A conditional restore request on a unit in the growth state will diagnose and
initialize the unit but will not change the state of the unit: the unit remains in the
growth state. An unconditional restore of a unit in the growth state is not permitted
unless the unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. An unconditional restore action of a CCC,
CCU, or BBA in the growth state (1) initializes the CCC as an active CCC with call
processing and error reporting inhibited, (2) configures all CEs on the CCU as
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-13
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
traffic channels, or (3) initializes the BBA as a standby BBA; the unit remains in
the growth state.
Other conditions pertaining to conditional and unconditional restore requests that
you need to be aware of are as follows:
■
For data links (DLs):
— A conditional restore request reverts to unconditional if there is no
link currently in-service; no diagnostic test is run.
— No action is performed if an unconditional restore request is made
on the currently in-service link.
■
For redundant units:
— An RCC conditional restore request compares the active and mate
mem-ories of the controller sides (RCC 0 and RCC 1) after the RCC
being restored has elevated to the standby state. A mismatch in
memory drops the RCC back to the out-of-service state and aborts
the restore request.
— An active RCC, CAT, or SCT having an out-of-service mate cannot
be conditionally or unconditionally restored.
— An active BBA having an out-of-service mate cannot be
conditionally restored unless (1) the BBA out-of-service threshold
limit is set to 100% and (2) the BBA becomes idle_free of
calls_within five minutes of issu-ing the conditional restore
command. An active BBA having an out-of-ser-vice mate can be
unconditionally restored.
— An active setup radio having an out-of-service mate cannot be
condition-ally restored but can be unconditionally restored.
— An active SCT having a standby mate cannot be conditionally
restored but can be unconditionally restored.
(In general, any conditional maintenance request that would
normally cause redundant units to switch is not permitted for SCTs.
The switching of SCTs could leave the associated CDMA
hardware_the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing
from the redundant SCTs_in an unknown state, which would require
the manual restore of the affected CCCs.)
— A standby SCT can be conditionally restored to the standby state
but not the active state. In contrast, a standby SCT can be
unconditionally restored to either the standby or active state.
■
For setup radios:
— A conditional restore action on an active setup radio having no
associated spare is not permitted.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-14
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
— An unconditional restore action on an active setup radio having no
associated spare is permitted.
— If call processing is inhibited, setup radios are in the standby state.
■
For both setup and analog locate radios:
— If a radio that was conditionally restored becomes active, a
functional test is immediately scheduled for the radio.
■
For DCCH radios:
— A conditional restore action on an active DCCH radio is not
permitted.
— An unconditional restore action on an active DCCH radio is
permitted, even if it is the last DCCH for the sector. The
unconditional restore action resets the DCCH (that is, resets the
DRU or EDRU carrying the DCCH).
■
For beacon radios:
— A conditional restore action on an active beacon radio is not
permitted.
— An unconditional restore action on an active beacon is permitted.
— A beacon radio’s transmitter is always turned back On as part of a
radio restore request sequence.
For radios involved in ARR:
■
A conditional restore request without the qualifier orig is applied to the
replace-ment radio; the rules governing the behavior of the conditional
restore command for each type of radio (setup, DCCH, beacon, analog
locate) remain in effect dur-ing an ARR condition.
A conditional restore request of an active setup, DCCH, or beacon radio
involved in an ARR condition is not permitted. A conditional restore request
of an active analog locate radio involved in an ARR condition is permitted
as long as such an action would not violate out-of-service limits for analog
locate radios
To conditionally restore a replacement radio, first unconditionally remove
the radio, then conditionally restore the radio. If the replacement radio
passes diag-nostics, the radio is restored to the active state. If the
replacement radio fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the out-of-service
state. Whether the replacement radio passes or fails diagnostics, the ARR
condition remains in effect.
■
A conditional restore request with the qualifier orig is applied to the original
radio. If the original radio passes diagnostics, the radio is restored to
service with its original personality and the replacement radio resumes its
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-15
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
former personality_ the ARR condition is terminated (reversed). If the
original radio fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the out-of-service state
and the ARR condition remains in effect.
■
A conditional restore request applied directly to the replacement radio (say
RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR.
An output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed
by the ARR feature and is not available.
■
An unconditional restore request without the qualifier orig is applied to the
replacement radio. If the restore action is successful, the replacement radio
is restored to the active state. If the restore action fails, the replacement
radio is left in the out-of-service state. Whether the restore action is
successful or unsuc-cessful, the ARR condition remains in effect.
■
An unconditional restore request with the qualifier orig is applied to the
original radio. If the restore action is successful, the original radio is
restored to the active state and the ARR condition is terminated (reversed).
If the restore action fails, the original radio is left in the out-of-service state
and the ARR condition remains in effect.
■
An unconditional restore request applied directly to the replacement radio
(say RA10) will be rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to
the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the radio is being
borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available.
Related
Documents
For more information on the restore maintenance action, refer to the RST CELL
and RST CELL SG commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055).
Switch to a
Redundant Unit
The switch to redundant unit maintenance action changes the state of a
maintenance unit from active to standby while at the same time changing the state
of a second unit (the associated redundant unit) from standby to active. The
purpose of the maintenance action is to transfer the functions of the first unit to the
second unit. (This maintenance action applies only to the RCC, CAT, SCT, BBA, or
setup radio).
If either of the redundant units is in the out-of-service state, the switch request
aborts with no action taken. For the CAT or SCT, the switch request will fail if the
CAT/ SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit. (Does not apply to SCT units
having logical CAT numbers 4 and 5.)
CAUTION:
Be aware that a switch action on a SCT could leave the associated CDMA
hard-ware_the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing from the
redundant SCTs_in an unknown state. You would have to manually restore
the affected CCCs.
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-16
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Related
Documents
For more information on the switch to redundant unit maintenance action, refer to
the SW CELL command in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055).
Start
Is radio
unequipped
Yes
Designated location
has no unit installed.
Yes
Removal of unit in
growth state is not
No
Is radio
in growth state
No
Yes
Is radio
in OOS state
Remove radio again
and tag unit OOS-
Return completioncode message to
No
End
Radio is in active state.
Is remove
request conditional or
unconditional
Uncond
To
Sheet 3
Cond
Is
radio beacon or
DCCH
Yes
Cond remove of
beacon or DCCH is not
Abort. Return error-
No
To
Sheet 2
End
Figure 15-1. Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU
(Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-17
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 1
Conditional remove of
voice radio (continued)
If removed,
is OOS threshold
exceeded
Yes
No
Is radio
idle or busy
Busy
For ECP R6.0 and Later: Attempt to handoff calls to another radio
of the same technology in the same sector; poll periodically to see
if radio is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5 minutes.
Idle
Yes
Does radio
become idle
No
Remove radio (place
unit out-of-service).
Unblock radio’s trunk(s).
Set radio’s state in
equipment status table
to OOS-RMVD.
Return completion-code
message to technician.
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
* MRA blocks radio’s trunk(s).
End
Figure 15-2. Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU
(Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-18
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 2
Unconditional remove of
voice radio (continued)
Is radio
idle or busy
Busy
For ECP R6.0 or later: Attempt to handoff calls to another radio of
the same technology in the same sector; poll periodically to see if
radio is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5 minutes.
Idle
Yes
Does radio
become idle
No
Remove radio (place
unit out-of-service).
Drop calls.
Set radio’s state in
equipment status table
to OOS-RMVD.
Return completion-code
message to technician.
End
* MRA blocks radio’s trunk(s).
Figure 15-3. Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU
(Sheet 3 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-19
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Start
Is CCC
unequipped
Yes
Designated location has
no unit installed.
No
Is CCC
in growth state
Yes
Reset CCC; CCC remains
in growth state.
Yes
Remove CCC again and
tag unit OOS-RMVD.
No
Is CCC
in OOS state
Return completion-code
message to technician.
No
End
CCC is in active state.
Is remove
request conditional or
unconditional
Uncond
To
Sheet 3
Cond
If removed,
is OOS threshold
exceeded
Yes
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
No
To
Sheet 2
End
Figure 15-4. Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-20
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 1
Conditional remove of
CCC (continued)
Is CCC
serving overhead
channels
No
Yes
Attempt to migrate overhead
channels to another CDMA
cluster within subcell.
Is migration
successful
No
Yes
Is CCC
idle or busy
Busy
Poll periodically to see if CCC is idle. Maximum waiting period is
5 minutes.
Idle
Yes
Does CCC
become idle
No
Remove CCC (place unit
out-of-service).
Unblock associated
CDMA cluster/ packet
pipe.
Set CCC’s state in
equipment status table
to OOS-RMVD; set any
active CCU under CCC
to OOS-POS.
Return completion-code
message to technician.
End
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
* MRA blocks associated CDMA cluster/ packet pipe.
Figure 15-5. Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 2 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-21
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 2
Unconditional remove of
CCC (continued)
Is CCC
serving overhead
channels
No
Yes
Attempt to migrate overhead
channels to another CDMA
cluster within subcell.
Is migration
successful
Yes
Is CCC
idle or busy
Busy
Poll periodically to see if CCC is idle. Maximum waiting period is
5 minutes.
Idle
Yes
Does CCC
become idle
No
Remove CCC (place unit
out-of-service).
Drop calls.
Set CCC’s state in
equipment status table
to OOS-RMVD; set any
active CCU under CCC
to OOS-POS.
Return completion-code
message to technician.
* MRA blocks associated CDMA cluster/ packet pipe.
** If migration fails, MRA sends warning to ECP.
MRA notifies ECP of any emergency call; currently,
technician cannot abort remove request.
End
Figure 15-6. Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 3 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-22
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
No **
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Start
Is CCU
unequipped
Yes
Designated location has
no unit installed.
No
Is CCU
in growth state
Yes
Reset CCU; CCU remains
in growth state.
Yes
Remove CCU again and
tag unit OOS-RMVD.
No
Is CCU
in OOS state
Return completion-code
message to technician.
No
End
CCU is in active state.
Is remove
request conditional or
unconditional
Uncond
To
Sheet 3
Cond
If removed,
is OOS threshold
exceeded
Yes
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
No
To
Sheet 2
End
Figure 15-7. Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-23
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 1
Conditional remove of
CCU (continued)
Is CCU
serving overhead
channels
No
Yes
Attempt to migrate overhead
channels to another CCU
within subcell.
Is migration
successful
Yes
Is CCU
idle or busy
Busy
Poll periodically to see if CCU is idle. Maximum waiting period is
5 minutes.
Idle
Yes
Does CCU
become idle
No
Remove CCU (place unit
out-of-service).
Unblock CCU.
Set CCU’s state in
equipment status table
to OOS-RMVD.
Return completion-code
message to technician.
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
* MRA blocks CCU from receiving calls.
End
Figure 15-8. Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 2 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-24
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
No
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 2
Unconditional remove of
CCU (continued)
Is CCU
serving overhead
channels
No
Yes
Attempt to migrate overhead
channels to another CCU
within subcell.
Is migration
successful
No **
Yes
Is CCU
idle or busy
Busy
Poll periodically to see if CCU is idle. Maximum waiting period is
5 minutes.
Idle
Yes
Does CCU
become idle
No
Remove CCU (place unit
out-of-service).
Drop calls.
Set CCU’s state in
equipment status table
to OOS-RMVD.
Return completion-code
message to technician.
* MRA blocks CCU from receiving any calls.
** If migration fails, MRA sends warning to ECP.
End
MRA notifies ECP of any emergency call; currently,
technician cannot abort remove request.
Figure 15-9. Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 3 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-25
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
Start
Is BBA
unequipped
Yes
Designated location has
no unit installed.
Yes
Reset BBA; BBA remains
in growth state.
Yes
Remove BBA again and
tag unit OOS-RMVD.
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
No
Is BBA
in growth state
No
Is BBA
in OOS state
Return completion-code
message to technician.
No
BBA is in active or
End
standby state.
Is BBA
in active or standby
state
Standby
Active
Does BBA
have a mate
Yes
Mate is in standby state.
To
Sheet 2
Yes
Is mate
in standby state
To
Sheet 2
Figure 15-10. Remove Flow of BBA (Sheet 1 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-26
No
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
No
To
Sheet 2
Corrective Maintenance using MRA
From
Sheet 1 1
From
Sheet 1
From
Sheet 1 2
(future)
BBA is in standby state.
Is BBA
part of subcell
All BBA
mates in subcell in
standby state
Yes
No
No
Yes
Switch BBA to standby &
mate to active (execute a
switch).
Switch BBAs to standby
& mates to active
(execute a switch).
Remove BBA (place unit
out-of-service).
Remove BBA (place unit
out-of-service).
Remove BBAs (place
units out-of-service).
Update equipment status
table: BBA = OOS-RMVD.
Update equipment status
table: BBA = OOS-RMVD,
mate = active.
Update equipment status
table: BBAs = OOSRMVD, mates = active.
Is remove
request conditional or
unconditional
Uncond
Cond
Return completion-code
message to technician.
Abort. Return error-code
message to technician.
Yes
If removed,
is OOS threshold
exceeded
No
To
Sheet 3
End
To
Sheet 4
Figure 15-11. Remove Flow of BBA (Sheet 2 of 3)
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000
15-27
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page
15-28
401-660-100 Issue 11
August 2000

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2000:09:21 04:32:05Z
Modify Date                     : 2001:06:20 12:31:36-03:00
Page Count                      : 265
Has XFA                         : No
Creation Date                   : 2000:09:21 04:32:05Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Sparc Solaris
Mod Date                        : 2001:06:20 12:31:36-03:00
Metadata Date                   : 2001:06:20 12:31:36-03:00

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools